03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-1
Safety Switches
Selection Criteria
Prosafe Trapped Key
Selection Flowchart ........................................................................................ 3-2
Selection Tips ................................................................................................. 3-3
Technology Overview ..................................................................................... 3-4
Overview .....................................................................................................
Rotary Switch .............................................................................................
Solenoid Release Unit ................................................................................
Electronic Timed-Delay Unit.......................................................................
Stopped Motion Units ................................................................................
Exchange Units ..........................................................................................
Bolt Interlocks.............................................................................................
Access/Chains Interlocks ...........................................................................
Slamlock .....................................................................................................
Miniature Valve Interlock ............................................................................
Switchgear Adaptors ..................................................................................
Accessories ................................................................................................
Tongue Switches
Elf™ ..............................................................................................................
Cadet™ 3 .....................................................................................................
Trojan™ T15 .................................................................................................
Trojan™ 5 & 6 ...............................................................................................
MT-GD2 ........................................................................................................
3-10
3-14
3-18
3-22
3-28
Guard Locking Switches
Overview ....................................................................................................... 3-33
440G-MT ...................................................................................................... 3-36
TLS-GD2....................................................................................................... 3-40
Atlas™ 5 ....................................................................................................... 3-46
Accessories for Interlock and Guard Locking Switches .............................. 3-50
Safety Limit Switches
IEC Style Switches
Overview .....................................................................................................
22 mm Plastic.............................................................................................
30 mm Metal...............................................................................................
15 mm Plastic.............................................................................................
3-133
3-134
3-139
3-143
NEMA Style Switches
802T Direct Opening Action ....................................................................... 3-145
2-Opto-electronics
Interlock Overview
Versatility ........................................................................................................ 3-6
Accessories for Tongue and Guard Locking Switches .................................. 3-7
Product Selection ........................................................................................... 3-8
Safety Switches and Connectors................................................................... 3-9
3-102
3-108
3-112
3-114
3-116
3-118
3-120
3-122
3-124
3-130
3-131
3-132
1-
Safety Switches
General
Table of Contents
Non-Contact Switches
3-56
3-70
3-74
3-76
3-80
3-84
3-86
3-Interlock
Switches
SensaGuard™ ..............................................................................................
Ferrogard™ 1, 2, 20 & 21.............................................................................
Ferrogard™ 3, 4 & 5 .....................................................................................
Ferrogard™ 6, 9, 10, 13 & 14.......................................................................
Ferrogard™ GD2 ..........................................................................................
Ferrogard™ GS1 & GS2 ...............................................................................
Sipha™ Sensors...........................................................................................
Hinge Switches
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
Sprite™......................................................................................................... 3-90
Ensign™ 3 .................................................................................................... 3-94
Rotacam™.................................................................................................... 3-98
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-1
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-2
Safety Switches
Selection Flowchart
Prosafe
Pro
General
Sequential
Access Control?
Yes
No
Guard Locking
1-
Does
the machine
have a long run down?
(high inertia
machine)
Yes
No
2-Opto-electronics
Non-Contact
Is it a
washdown
environment?
Limit
Or
Yes
No
3-Interlock
Switches
Type of Guard
Swinging
Sliding
Operator
Interface
Hard Guarding Light Guard
Removable
Light Guard
d
Recommended
Product Type
Tongue
Guard Locking
Logic
Non-Contact
Hinge
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-2
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-3
Safety Switches
Selection Tips
A Sequential Access Control system requires that a predetermined sequence of events takes place or that hazards have been reduced
before operators can become exposed to them. Prosafe trapped key interlocks are a mechanical system based on coded keys that
achieves this via the premise that no single key can be used in two places at once. And because of their mechanical operation, Prosafe
trapped key interlocks are widely used in applications where the location of plant, environment or explosive atmospheres make the use
of electrical interlock systems unsuitable or expensive to install.
General
Sequential Access Control
A High Inertia Machine is one on which hazardous motion does not cease immediately when the safety measures are engaged. As a
result, there is a possibility that an operator can reach the hazard while it is “running down” and is still dangerous. Interlock switches
with guard locking reduce the risk that the guard opens during hazardous machine motion.
1-
High Inertia Machine (Long Run Down Time)
Alternative measures:
Washdown Environments
In many applications, primarily those in the pharmaceutical and food/beverage industries, frequent washdown of the machinery with
water and/or cleaning fluids is common. Therefore, it is important to select a safety switch with the appropriate environmental protection
as indicated by the product’s enclosure (Ingress Protection or IP) rating. Non-contact switches have no “traps” where debris can
accumulate and are available in fully sealed versions (IP67/IP68/IP69K), making them ideal for washdown applications.
2-Opto-electronics
Install a braking device which stops the machine motion in a shorter time span.
Increase the distance between the guard door and the hazard such that the operator cannot physically reach the hazard before it has
stopped.
3-Interlock
Switches
For details on enclosure ratings, refer to the General section of this catalog (page G-9) and IEC 529.
Tongue Switches
Limit Switches
Large Door
Non-Contact Switches
Hinge Switches
Vibration
Misalignment
Debris
Washdown
Operator
Interface
Other Application Considerations
Power
Logic
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-3
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-4
Safety Switches
Technology Overview
Tongue Interlock Switches
Features/Benefits
General
Tongue interlock switches are the most commonly used technology for door interlocking.
They detect the movement of a guard using a key fitted to an opening in the switch body.
Available in a variety of packages, contact configurations and degrees of holding force,
these switches are generally the lowest-cost solution. The use of flexible keys also enhances
tolerance to misalignment to address an even broader range of applications.
Common Misapplications
Washdown
Heavy debris
Cutting fluids
Removable guards
1-
Applications
Wide range of doors
2-Opto-electronics
Guard Locking Interlock Switches
Features/Benefits
Guard locking switches employ the same principle of operation as tongue interlocks, but
feature an internal solenoid that locks the key—and therefore the guard—in place until the
machine’s power is isolated. Ideal for applications requiring controlled access to hazardous
areas, guard locking switches are available in a variety of holding forces and with flexible
actuators for optimal performance.
3-Interlock
Switches
Applications
Common Misapplications
Printing presses
Large access doors
Saws/cutting blades
High inertia machinery
Web machines
Wet environments
Improper holding force selected
Operator
Interface
Non-Contact Interlock Switches
Features/Benefits
Since there is no contact between actuator and switch, non-contact switches offer simple
setup and alignment, less wear, and superior tamper-resistance as well as reduced
installation cost. In addition, the IP67- and IP69K-sealed plastic or stainless steel housings
make them ideal for food processing applications and other harsh environments.
Logic
Applications
Common Misapplications
Hinged doors
A wide range of doors
Mounted at the door hinge
Mounted to mild steel
Exposed to rapid temperature changes
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-4
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-5
Safety Switches
Technology Overview
Hinge Interlock Switches
Common Misapplications
Large doors
Doors with poor hinge alignment
Limit Switches
Features/Benefits
Available in a variety of actuators and contact configurations, safety position (limit) switches
satisfy Machinery Directive requirements. 802T limit switches with direct opening action offer
positive opening safety contacts in a rugged NEMA-style housing for use in control reliable
and other safety applications, while 440P IEC limit switches provide safety function in a
compact, economical package.
Common Misapplications
Conveyors
Slide doors
Muting sensors
Robot positioning
Mounting a single limit switch on a guard
door
Features/Benefits
Prosafe™ trapped-key interlock switches are designed to provide power isolation, key
exchange and interlocking for safety applications requiring a pre-defined sequence of
operations. Most of these rugged products do not require power to operate, making them
ideal for applications in remote or intrinsically safe locations. Stainless steel construction
also allows their use in harsh environments for process/valve control.
Common Misapplications
Sequencing/process control
Intrinsic safety
1/4 turn valves
Duplicate coded keys on the plant floor
Power
Applications
Logic
Trapped Key Switches
Operator
Interface
3-Interlock
Switches
Applications
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Applications
Hinged doors
General
Features/Benefits
Hinge switches are designed to fit at the hinge point of swinging guards. Because they do
not use keys which must slide into a slot in the switch body, hinge switches are ideal for
machines with misaligned doors or applications with contaminants that could be caught in a
key slot. Offering a higher integrity level than standard tongue interlocks, hinge switches are
difficult to defeat and can be adjusted for the opening angle of the door.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-5
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-6
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Versatility
General
Many safety switches allow the head of the switch to rotate, offering different options on how the switch can be operated and mounted on
the guard. This offers flexibility to best fit typical applications.
Elf, Cadet3, MT-GD2, 440G-MT
The head can be rotated 4 times at 90º allowing the key to fit the switch in 8 different positions.
1-
Trojan T15, Trojan 5, Trojan 6 (Not GD2 Models)
The head rotates 180º allowing the key to fit the switch in 4 different
positions: 2 in the front, 1 in the top and 1 in the back.
2-Opto-electronics
180°
TLS-GD2
The head rotates 180º allowing the key to fit the switch in 4 different positions: 2 in the front,
1 in the top and 1 in the back.
3-Interlock
Switches
180°
Sprite, Ensign
The head can be rotated 4 times at 90º allowing the
switch to be mounted in 4 different positions.
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-6
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-7
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Accessories for Tongue and Guard Locking Switches
The correct actuator for your application
General
A large variety of tongue actuators are available:
Standard: 90º, Flat, Standard
Flexible: Semi and Fully
Specialty: Extended Flat and GD2 models
GD2 actuators are dedicated actuators for GD2 models and are not suitable for use with
standard models.
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
Extended flat type actuator is used mostly when the actuator is mounted on a chain and inserted
in the switch. The guard is latched and the key is just inserted in the switch attached to a chain.
When the door opens, the chain pulls the actuator activating the safety contacts.
3-Interlock
Switches
2-Opto-electronics
Flexible type actuators are used when doors are sagging or are not sturdy enough to guarantee
insertion of the actuator always in-line with the opening of the switch. The flexible actuator
allows for some motion of the actuator to "self” align with the opening of the switch. Fully
flexible actuators allow the actuator to move within a 15º angle in any direction. Semi-flexible
actuators can be used for tight angles where the actuator enters the switch at an angle. This
angle is adjustable on the actuator. The semi-flexible actuator moves only in a single plan
direction.
1-
Standard type actuators accommodate most of the applications. Their design allows for the
actuator and the switch to be mounted in different position and the guard to work properly. The
flat actuator is mounted on small rubber blocks allowing for some play when the guard closes.
The 90º is typically used on sliding doors.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-7
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-8
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Product Selection
General
Description
Elf
Cadet 3
T15
T15 GD2
T5-T6
T5 GD2T6 GD2 MT-GD2 TLS GD2
Atlas 5
440GMT
Standard actuator
440K-A11095
Standard actuator
Cat. No.
440K-A11238
Standard actuator
440G-A07136
1GD2 standard
actuator
2-Opto-electronics
Flat actuator, not to
be used with metal
alignment guide
3-Interlock
Switches
Fully flex actuator
Extended flat
actuator
Operator
Interface
440G-A27011
440K-A11112
440K-A21006
Fully flex actuator
Metal alignment
guide with semiflexible actuator
440K-A21014
GD2 flat actuator
90° actuator, not to
be used with metal
alignment guide
440G-A27143
440G-A07269
440K-A17116
440K-A21030
Logic
Alignment guide with
semi-flexible
actuator
Alignment guide with
fully-flexible actuator
440K-A11144
440K-A27010
Catch and Retainer
Kit
440K-A11094
Replacement
Alignment Guide
440K-A11115
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-8
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-9
Safety Switches
Interlock Switches
Overview
Safety Switches and Connectors
General
Many interlock switches are offered with connectors allowing easy installation and replacement on-site, reducing downtime. Standard
cordsets and connectors can be used to connect these products directly to:
Terminal Blocks
Safety Distribution Boxes
ArmorBlock™ Guard I/O (IP 67 Safety I/O Blocks on DeviceNet™ Safety)
Cordset
Patchcord
Type of Connectors
Terminal Block
Safety Distribution Box
4-Pin Micro (M12)
8-Pin Micro (M12)
12-Pin M23
1-
5-Pin Micro (M12)
6-Pin Micro (M12)
ArmorBlock Guard I/O
Type of Connector by Product Family
Interlock
Guard Locking
Elf
Cadet
T15
T5
T6
MT-GD2
TLS
Atlas 5
440G-MT
4-Pin Micro (M12)
6-Pin MIcro (M12)
Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)
Other Connectors
8-Pin Micro (M12)
12-Pin M23
Type of Connector by Product Family (continued)
Non-Contact
SensaGuard
Description
Hinge
Ferrogard
2, 20
21
Cable Pull
Sipha
6, 9, SS
S3
Lifeline
SS S4
Sprite
Ensign
Rotacam
3
4
SS 4
3-Interlock
Switches
Description
Connection to Distribution Box
2-Opto-electronics
Trojan
Connection to Distribution Box
4-Pin Micro (M12)
6-Pin MIcro (M12)
5-Pin Micro (M12)
Other Connectors
8-Pin Micro (M12)
12-Pin M23
Operator
Interface
Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O
Note: All connectors on Safety Switches are male.
Connectors Ratings
Applicable Standards
250V, 4 A
250V, 4 A
IEC 61076-2-101:2003
5-Pin Micro (M12)
60V, 4 A
60V, 4 A
IEC 61076-2-101:2003
6-Pin Micro (M12)
30V, 2 A
30V, 2 A
IEC 61076-2-101:2003
8-Pin Micro (M12)
30V, 2 A
30V, 2 A
IEC 61076-2-101:2003
12-Pin M23
63V, 6 A
63V, 6 A
IEC 61984:2001
Power
DC
4-Pin Micro (M12)
Logic
Max. Ratings
AC
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-9
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-10
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf™
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/
EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual
channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or
4 systems
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, TÜV, and CCC
Outputs
Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action
1Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Elf is a tongue-operated (or key-operated) safety interlock
switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off
guards. The Elf's unique miniature housing (only 75 x 25 x 29 mm
(2.95 x 0.98 x 1.14 in.)) makes it the smallest interlock currently
available. It is designed for smaller machines such as printers,
copiers and domestic machinery which, until now, have been unable
to use safety interlocks due to space restrictions. With its dual entry
slots and rotatable head, the versatile Elf can offer up to eight
different actuator entry options.
Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a
specially-profiled stainless-steel key that is permanently mounted to
the guard door. The semi-flexible key allows the Elf to be used on
small-radii doors (60 mm or 2.36 in.).
3-Interlock
Switches
The Elf is available with a variety of contact configurations, conduit
entry types and connectors. It is sealed to IP67 (watertight and
dustproof). A blanking plug is supplied for the unused key entry.
Features
Operator
Interface
Ideal for small, lightweight guards
The smallest interlock switch available
Contacts, 2 N.C. or 1 N.O. and 1 N.C.
Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install
Environmental protection: IP67
GD2 style available for demanding applications
1 N.C.
2 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
None
Thermal CurrentIlth
5 A (10 A if A600)
Rated Insulation Voltage
2500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
DC-13
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3.0 A
6.0 A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Operating Characteristics
Break Contact Force, Min.
6 N (1.35 lbf)
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Operating Radius, Min
150 mm (5.90 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with
GD2 kit, min.]
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1 x 106 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+80° (-4…+176°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (oz)]
60 (2.11)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-10
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-11
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf™
Product Selection
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
—
Actuator Type
M16
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
Flat
440K-E33036
440K-E33029
440K-E33074
Connect to
ArmorBlock Guard
I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)
♣
⎯
90°
440K-E33040
440K-E33030
440K-E33025
⎯
GD2 Metal alignment guide
w/semi-flex actuator
440K-E33034
440K-E33031
440K-E33075
⎯
⎯
440K-E2NNFPS
Action
BBM
—
—
440K-E33014
440K-E33053
440K-E33076
Flat
440K-E33080
440K-E33037
440K-E33077
1-
Auxiliary
Connector§
Connect to
Distribution
Box
4-Pin Micro
(M12)
90°
440K-E33041
440K-E33045
440K-E33024
⎯
GD2 Metal alignment guide
w/semi-flex actuator
⎯
440K-E33046
440K-E33078
440K-E2NNAPS
—
440K-E33047
⎯
440K-E33079
⎯
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
§ With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-13 for wiring details.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Safety Outputs
Description
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23132
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-14
440R-F23027
1 N.O.
Removable
Auto. or Monitored
Manual
24V DC SELV
5-18
440R-F23200
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State
1 N.O. Solid State
2-Opto-electronics
Safety
M16 Conduit
General
Cat. No.
Contact
2 N.O.
MSR33RT
2 N.O. Solid State
1 N.C.
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-74
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-78
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-94
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-98
440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see the Safety Relays section (page 5-8) of this catalog.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see the Programmable Safety System section (page 5-107) of this catalog.
For application and wiring diagrams, see the Safety Applications section (page 10-1) of this catalog.
Operator
Interface
MSR9T
3-Interlock
Switches
Single-Function Safety Relays for 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Contact Switch
Connection Systems
Description
Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
889D-F4AC-1
889D-F4AC-1
—
Patchcord
889D-F4ACDM-
889D-F4ACDM-
889R-F5ECRM-1
Distribution Box
Cordset
2 N.C.
898D-P4‡KT-DM4
898D-4‡LT-DM4
—
Shorting Plug
898D-41KU-DM
898D-41LU-DM
—
T-Port
898D-43KY-D4
898D-43LY-D4
—
Logic
Connection to Distribution Box
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Power
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports.
Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-11
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-12
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf™
Accessories
Description
General
Cat. No.
Flat actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide
3-52
440K-A21014
90° actuator, not to be used with metal alignment guide
3-52
440K-A21006
Metal alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator
3-52
440K-A21030
Metal Alignment Guide
3-52
440K-A21069
Replacement Cover
—
440A-A33085
Dust Cover
—
440K-A17182
1-
Dimensions
2-Opto-electronics
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
75 (2.95)
29 (1.14)
4 (0.16)
25 (0.98)
4.5 (0.18)
Operator
Interface
75
(2.95)
13 (0.51)
12.5 (0.49)
6 (0.24)
17.5 (0.69)
4 (0.16)
2 x M4
4.5 (0.18)
1 x M16
Logic
3 (0.12)
34.5 (1.36)
36 (1.42)
13 (0.51)
18 (0.71)
25 (0.98)
16.5 (0.65)
12.5
(0.49)
6 (0.24)
3-Interlock
Switches
Approximate Dimensions
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-12
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-13
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Elf™
Typical Wiring Diagrams
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
General
Description
Contact Configuration
11
12
Safety A (NC)
11
12
Safety A (NC)
23
24
Aux A (NO)
21
22
Safety B (NC)
3.3
0 mm
6
Closed
BBM
2-Aux A
4-Pin Micro (M12)
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
2-Safety B
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
4-Safety B
4-Aux A
2-Safety A
5-Safety B
5-Pin Micro (M12)
For ArmorBlock Guard I/O
0 mm
2-Opto-electronics
Open
3.3
Safety A
Safety B
3.8
1-
6
Safety A
Aux A
Contact Action
—
1-Safety A
3-N/A
Blue
Cordset
889D-F4AC-1
White
Black
Safety A
Safety A
Aux A
Safety B
3-Interlock
Switches
4-Safety B
Brown
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-13
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-14
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet™ 3
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/
EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual
channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or
4 systems
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, TÜV, and CCC
Outputs
Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action
1Description
2 N.C.
3 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
None
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
5 mA @ 5V DC
2-Opto-electronics
The Cadet 3 is a tongue-operated (or key-operated) safety interlock
switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding, hinged or lift-off
guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head, the versatile
Cadet 3 can offer up to eight different actuator entry options. The
unique compact housing (90.5 x 31 x 30.4 mm (3.56 x 1.22 x
1.19 in.)) has industry standard DIN 50047 fixing centers for ease of
mounting.
Utilization Category
Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a
specially-profiled stainless-steel key that is permanently mounted to
the guard door. A semi-flexible key allows the Cadet 3 to be used
on small-radii doors (60 mm or 2.36 in.).
Break Contact Force, Min.
Available with a variety of contact configurations, the Cadet 3 is
sealed to IP67. A blanking plug is supplied for the unused key entry.
A600/AC-15
DC-13
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3.0 A
6.0 A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Operating Characteristics
15 N (3.37 lbf)
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Operating Radius, Min
150 mm (5.90 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with
GD2 kit]
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1 x 106 operations
Environmental
3-Interlock
Switches
Features
Compact size
Ideal for small, lightweight guards
Contacts, 2 N.C. and 1 N.O. or 3 N.C.
Sealed to IP67
Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install
Industry standard fixing centres to DIN 50047
GD2 style available for demanding applications
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+ 80° (-4…+176°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
80 (0.176)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
Operator
Interface
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-14
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-15
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet™ 3
Product Selection
Cat. No.
M16 Conduit
3 N.C.
—
—
BBM
2 N.C.
Actuator Type
M16
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
Flat
440K-C21096
440K-C21048
440K-C21090
90°
440K-C21097
440K-C21057
440K-C21091
⎯
GD2 Metal alignment guide
w/semi-flex actuator
⎯
440K-C21062
440K-C21092
440K-C2NNAPS
Action
—
440K-C21070
440K-C21098
⎯
440K-C21050
⎯
440K-C21054
⎯
Flat
90°
440K-C21061
440K-C21058
440K-C21067
⎯
GD2 Metal alignment guide
w/semi-flex actuator
⎯
440K-C21074
440K-C21088
⎯
—
440K-C21055
440K-C21052
⎯
440K-C21060
⎯
Flat
⎯
440K-C21093
90°
440K-C21065
440K-C21094
440K-C21068
⎯
GD2 Metal alignment guide
w/semi-flex actuator
⎯
440K-C21095
440K-C21089
⎯
—
440K-C21080
⎯
⎯
⎯
1 N.O.
MBB
440K-C2NNFPS
⎯
1-
Auxiliary
Connect to
ArmorBlock Guard
I/O
5-Pin Micro
(M12)♣
⎯
2-Opto-electronics
Safety
Connector§
Connect to
Distribution
Box
6-Pin Micro
(M12)
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
§ With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-17 for wiring details.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
General
Contact
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23135
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-22
440R-N23117
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State
1 N.O. Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-74
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-78
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-94
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-98
440R-W23218
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see the Safety Relays section (page 5-8) of this catalog.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see the Programmable Safety System section (page 5-107) of this catalog.
For application and wiring diagrams, see the Safety Applications section (page 10-1) of this catalog.
Operator
Interface
MSR127RP
MSR127TP
3-Interlock
Switches
Single-Function Safety Relays
Description
Cordset
6-Pin Micro
(M12)
5-Pin Micro
(M12)
889R-F6ECA-1
—
Logic
Connection Systems
889R-F6ECRM- 889R-F5ECRM-1
Patchcord
Distribution Box
Shorting Plug
T-Port
898R-P68MT-A5
—
898R-P61MU-RM
—
NA
—
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Power
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-15
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-16
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet™ 3
Accessories
Description
Dimensions
Cat. No.
General
Flat actuator, not to be used with metal
alignment guide
440K-A21014
90° actuator, not to be used with metal
alignment guide
440K-A21006
3-52
Metal alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator
440K-A21030
1—
440A-A21115
Dust Cover
—
440K-A17182
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
90.5 (3.56)
25.0 ( 0.98 )
22.0 ( 0.87)
3-Interlock
Switches
31.0
(1.22)
2 0.0 ( 0.79)
Front Entry
38.4 (1.51)
36.4 (1.43)
34.4 (1.35)
13.0 ( 0.51 )
2-Opto-electronics
Replacement Cover
4.5 (0.18)
R 2.15
4 (0.16)
Operator
Interface
25.0 (0.98)
30.4 (1.2)
M16
Thread Form
4
(0.16)
13.0
(0.51)
4.5
(0.18)
13.0
(0.51)
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-16
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-17
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Cadet™ 3
Typical Wiring Diagrams
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
3 N.C.
General
Description
Contact Configuration
11
12
Safety A (NC)
11
12
Safety A (NC)
21
22
Safety B (NC)
21
22
Safety B (NC)
33
34
Aux A (NO)
31
32
Safety C (NC)
0 mm
1-
3.1
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
3.7
3.1
BBM
3.5
Closed
Open
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
2-Opto-electronics
Contact Action
2.5
MBB
6-Safety B
2-Safety B
3-Aux A
4-Aux A
2-Safety B
4-Safety C
1-Safety A
5-Safety A
1-Safety A
5-Safety A
2-Safety A
5-Safety B
5-Pin Micro (M12)
—
1-Safety A
3-Interlock
Switches
6-Pin Micro (M12)
6-Safety B
3-Safety C
3-N/A
4-Safety B
Red/White
Red/Black
Red
Cordset
889R-F6ECA-1
Red/Blue
Green
Red/Yellow
Safety A
Safety A
Safety B
Safety B
Aux A
Safety C
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-17
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-18
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ T15
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/
EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, TÜV, and CCC
Outputs
Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action
1Description
2 N.C.
1 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts
None
1 N.O.
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC
2-Opto-electronics
3-Interlock
Switches
The Trojan T15 is a compact universal tongue-operated (or keyoperated) safety interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge
of sliding, hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and
rotatable head, movable only by releasing the cover screws, the
Trojan T15 can offer four different options for actuator entry.
Utilization Category
The Trojan T15 features a compact housing, only 75 x 52 x 32 mm
(2.95 x 2.04 x 1.25 in.) and includes direct opening action contacts
and a tamper-resistant mechanism. The Trojan T15 has 2 N.C.
safety contacts or 1 N.C. safety contact and 1 N.O. auxiliary
contact. The unit is sealed to IP67 and has three M20 conduit
entries.
(le)
Operation of the switch is achieved by the insertion of the speciallyprofiled stainless-steel actuator which should be permanently fixed
to the leading edge of the guard door. The standard T15
incorporates actuator retention force of 30N. An optional catch
mechanism helps keep doors shut on vibrating machinery.
A600/AC-15 (Ue)
(le)
DC-13 (Ue)
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3.0 A
6.0 A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Operating Characteristics
Break Contact Force, Min.
30 N (6.70 lbf)
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Operating Radius, Min
175 mm (6.89 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.) with
flexible actuator]
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1 x 106 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+80° (-4…+176°)
Physical Characteristics
Features
Compact size, 75 x 52 x 32 mm (2.95 x 2.05 x 1.26 in.) case
30 N actuator retention force
Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications
Contacts: 2 N.C. safety or 1 N.C. safety & 1 N.O. auxillary
GD2 style available for demanding applications
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
120 (0.265)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
Operator
Interface
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-18
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-19
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ T15
Product Selection
2 N.C.
—
Actuator Type
M20
Standard
440K-T11303
440K-T11267
440K-T11307
440K-V2NNSPS
Fully-Flex
440K-T11395
440K-T11273
440K-T11384
440K-V2NNBPS
—
—
440K-T11269
⎯
440K-T11305
⎯
440K-T11268
440K-T11385
Standard
440K-T11386
⎯
Fully-Flex
440K-T11396
440K-T11276
440K-T11387
⎯
—
440K-T11270
440K-T11388
GD2 Standard
440K-T11463
⎯
440K-T11288
440K-T11389
⎯
440K-V2NNGPS-NG
Fully-Flex
440K-T11397
440K-T11287
440K-T11390
⎯
—
440K-T11280
440K-T11391
⎯
GD2 Standard
440K-T11398
⎯
440K-T11284
440K-T11392
⎯
Fully-Flex
440K-T11399
440K-T11283
440K-T11393
⎯
—
440K-T11279
⎯
440K-T11394
⎯
Trojan T15
Standard
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
—
BBM
—
Trojan T15
GD2
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
1-
Auxiliary
Connect to ArmorBlock
Guard I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23132
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State
1 N.O. Solid State
2-Opto-electronics
Safety
Type
Contact
Action
Connector§
Connect to
Distribution Box
4-Pin Micro (M12)
General
Cat. No.
M20 Conduit
Contact
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-14
440R-F23027
2 N.O. Solid State
1 N.O.
Removable
Auto. or Monitored
Manual
24V DC SELV
5-18
440R-F23200
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-74
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-78
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-94
440R-W23219
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-98
440R-W23218
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see the Safety Relays section (page 5-8) of this catalog.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see the Programmable Safety System section (page 5-107) of this catalog.
For application and wiring diagrams, see the Safety Applications section (page 10-1) of this catalog.
Operator
Interface
MSR9T
MSR33RT
3-Interlock
Switches
Single-Function Safety Relays for 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Contact Switch
Connection Systems
Connection to ArmorBlock Guard I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)
2 N.C.
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
889D-F4AC-1
889D-F4AC-1
—
889D-F4ACDM-
889D-F4ACDM-
889D-F5ACDM-1
Distribution Box
898D-4‡LT-DM4
898D-P4‡KT-DM4
—
Shorting Plug
898D-41LU-DM
898D-41KU-DM
—
898D-43LY-D4
898D-43KY-D4
—
Description
Cordset
Patchcord
T-Port
2 N.C.
Logic
Connection to Distribution Box
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Power
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports.
Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-19
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-20
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ T15
Accessories
Description
Dimensions
Cat. No.
Standard actuator
Trojan T15 Standard Models Only
3-51
440K-A11238
GD2 standard actuator
Trojan GD2 Models Only
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
Trojan GD2 Models Only
General
To Be Used With:
440K-A11112
1-
3-51
2-Opto-electronics
Discard Alignment Guide for GD2 Models
Alignment guide with fully-flexible actuator
Discard Alignment Guide for GD2 Models
3-52
440K-A27010
Sliding bolt actuator
Trojan GD2 Models Only
3-55
440G-A27163
Catch and Retainer Kit
Trojan T15 Standard Models Only
3-50
440K-A11094
Replacement Cover
All Models
—
440A-A11499
Dust Cover
All Models
—
440K-A17180
3-Interlock
Switches
Alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator
440K-A11144
Approximate Dimensions
40 (1.57)
20.5
(0.81)
Operator
Interface
52 (2.05)
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
5.5 (0.22)
2 x M5
5 (0.2)
3 x M20
33.4 (1.31)
5 (0.2)
31 (1.22)
13 (0.51)
15 (0.59)
16
(0.62)
5.5 (0.22)
Logic
32 (1.26)
GD2
20.5
(0.81)
15.75
(0.62)
41 (1.61)
75 (2.95)
Power
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-20
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-21
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ T15
Typical Wiring Diagrams
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
General
Description
Contact Configuration
11
12
Safety A (NC)
11
12
Safety A (NC)
23
24
Aux A (NO)
21
22
Safety B (NC)
10
6
0 mm
Closed
Open
20
15
10
BBM
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
2-Safety B
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
4-Safety B
4-Aux A
2-Safety A
5-Safety B
5-Pin Micro (M12)
For ArmorBlock Guard I/O
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
2-Aux A
4-Pin Micro (M12)
6
1-
15
Safety A
Aux A
2-Opto-electronics
20
Contact Action
—
1-Safety A
3-N/A
Blue
Cordset
889D-F4AC-1
White
Black
Safety A
Safety A
Aux A
Safety B
3-Interlock
Switches
4-Safety B
Brown
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-21
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-22
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ 5 & 6
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS
4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual
channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or
4 systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load
PFHD: > 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable
for performance levels Ple or Pld
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and
for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending on
application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, TÜV, and CCC
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Trojan family is a universal tongue-operated (or key-operated)
safety-interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding,
hinged or lift-off guards. The dual key entry slots and rotatable
head, movable only by releasing the cover screws, allow four
actuator entry options. The Trojan contains all of the safety related
functions—i.e., forced guided contacts, tamper resistant
mechanism—allowing the machine to be safeguarded in compliance
with the machine directive.
Operation of the switch is achieved through the insertion of a
specially-profiled stainless-steel key that is permanently mounted to
the leading edge of the guard door. The standard (not GD2) Trojan
actuator includes a self-ejecting mechanism that prevents operation
of the switch if the actuator is not mounted to the guard door (e.g.,
if the operator uses a spare key).
Outputs
Safety Contacts Direct Opening Action
3 N.C.
2 N.C.
2 N.C.
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
2 N.O.
1 N.O.
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
Trojan 5
A300/AC-15
(Ue) 240V
(le) 3 A
6A
DC-13
(Ue) 24V
24V
120V
3-Interlock
Switches
(le) 2 A
Features
Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications
Self-ejecting tamper resistant actuator, only operates when
mounted to the guard (not with GD2 models)
Four possible actuator entry points, easy to install
GD2 style available for demanding applications
Trojan 6
A600/AC-15
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3A
6A
DC-13
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Operating Characteristics
Break Contact Force, Min.
Trojan 5: 12 N (2.7 lbf) & 30 N (6.75 lbf)
Trojan 6: 20 N (4.5 lbf)
Operator
Interface
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Operating Radius, Min
175 mm (6.89 in.)
[60 mm (2.36 in.) with flexible actuator]
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1 x 106 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+80° (-4…+176°)
Physical Characteristics
Logic
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
160 (0.35)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-22
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-23
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ 5 & 6
Product Selection
Action
BBM
BBM
Gold
Contacts
Trojan 5
Standard
MBB
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
Trojan 5 GD2
MBB
Trojan 5 30 N
BBM
Actuator Type
M20
Standard
440K-T11090
440K-T11202
440K-T11205
⎯
Guide/SemiFlex
440K-T11110
440K-T11203
440K-T11206
⎯
Guide/FullyFlex
440K-T11467
440K-T11204
440K-T11207
440K-T2NNBPS
—
440K-T11089
⎯
440K-T11129
⎯
Standard
440K-T11085
⎯
⎯
⎯
Standard
440K-T11118
440K-T11208
440K-T11224
⎯
Guide/SemiFlex
440K-T11123
440K-T11209
440K-T11363
⎯
Guide/FullyFlex
440K-T11468
440K-T11210
440K-T11364
⎯
1-
Auxiliary
Connect to ArmorBlock
Guard I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)♣
—
440K-T11146
440K-T11469
440K-T11365
GD2 Standard
440K-T11336
440K-T11211
440K-T11366
⎯
440K-T2NNGPS-NG
Guide/SemiFlex
440K-T11337
440K-T11212
440K-T11367
⎯
Guide/FullyFlex
440K-T11338
440K-T11213
440K-T11368
⎯
—
440K-T11147
⎯
440K-T11339
⎯
440K-T11470
440K-T11226
GD2 Standard
440K-T11369
⎯
Guide/SemiFlex
440K-T11340
440K-T11471
440K-T11370
⎯
Guide/FullyFlex
440K-T11341
440K-T11472
440K-T11371
⎯
—
440K-T11167
⎯
440K-T11372
⎯
Standard
440K-T11333
440K-T91024
440K-T11492
⎯
2-Opto-electronics
Safety
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
3-Interlock
Switches
Type
Connector§
Connect to
Distribution Box
6-Pin Micro (M12)
General
Cat. No.
M20 Conduit
Contact
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
§ With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-27 for wiring details.
Cat. No.
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
Trojan 6
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
MBB
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
MBB
Trojan 6 GD2
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
MBB
Connector§
Actuator Type
M20
1/2 inch NPT Adaptor
8-Pin Micro (M12)♣
Standard
440K-T11171
440K-T11435
⎯
—
440K-T11449
440K-T11408
⎯
Standard
440K-T11174
440K-T11438
—
440K-T11452
440K-T11416
⎯
440K-W21BNPH
—
440K-T11453
440K-T11454
440K-W21MNPH
GD2 Standard
440K-T11418
440K-T11466
⎯
—
440K-T11188
440K-T11444
⎯
—
440K-T11456
440K-T11457
⎯
GD2 Standard
440K-T11445
440K-T11425
—
440K-T11459
440K-T11433
⎯
440K-W21BNPH-NG
—
440K-T11460
440K-T11461
440K-W21MNPH-NG
Operator
Interface
Type
Logic
M20 Conduit
Contact
Power
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
§ With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-27 for wiring details.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-23
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-24
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ 5 & 6
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
General
Single-Function Safety Relays
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-22
440R-N23117
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-74
440R-H23176
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
1-
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-78
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-94
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-98
440R-W23218
2-Opto-electronics
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see the Safety Relays section (page 5-8) of this catalog.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see the Programmable Safety System section (page 5-107) of this catalog.
For application and wiring diagrams, see the Safety Applications section (page 10-1) of this catalog.
Connection Systems
Trojan 5
Description
Cordset
Patchcord
5-Pin Micro (M12)
Trojan 6
6-Pin Micro (M12)
8-Pin Micro (M12)
—
889R-F6ECA-1
889D-F8AB-1
889R-F5ECRM-1
889R-F6ECRM-
889D-F8ABDM-
3-Interlock
Switches
Distribution Box
—
898R-F68MT-A5
—
Shorting Plug
—
898R-P61MU-RM
—
T-Port
—
—
—
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports.
Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-24
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-25
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ 5 & 6
To Be Used With:
Dimensions
Cat. No.
Standard actuator
Trojan T5 and T6 Standard Models Only
3-51
440K-A11095
GD2 standard actuator
GD2 Models Only
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
GD2 Models Only
3-51
440K-A11112
Alignment guide with semi-flexible actuator
Discard Alignment Guide for GD2 Models
3-51
440K-A11144
Alignment guide with fully-flexible actuator
Discard Alignment Guide for GD2 Models
3-52
440K-A27010
Sliding bolt actuator
GD2 Models Only
3-55
440G-A27163
Catch and Retainer Kit
Trojan T5 and T6 Standard Models Only
3-50
440K-A11094
Trojan T5 Standard Models Only
Trojan T6 Standard Models Only
440A-A11495
—
Trojan T6 GD2
All Models
440A-A11497
440A-A11498
—
440K-A17180
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
Dust Cover
440A-A11496
3-Interlock
Switches
Replacement Cover
Trojan T5 GD2
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Description
General
Accessories
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-25
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-26
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ 5 & 6
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
Standard Model
End Entry
5
(0.2)
32
(1.26)
1-
3
(0.12)
15.75
(0.62)
20.5
(0.81)
15.75
(0.62)
9 (0.35)
5
(0.2)
3
(0.12)
95 (3.74)
24 (0.94)
5 (0.2)
2-Opto-electronics
5.5 (0.22)
Front Entry
20.5
(0.81)
52
(2.05)
40
(1.57)
15.75 (0.62)
46 (1.81)
7 (0.28)
3-Interlock
Switches
Mounting Holes
for M5 Screws
8 (0.31)
32 (1.26)
GD2 Model
End Entry
32
(1.26)
3
(0.12)
36
(1.42)
5 (0.2)
14
(0.55)
15.75
(0.62)
20.5
(0.81)
9 (0.35)
5.5
(0.22)
3
(0.12)
5 (0.2)
95 (3.74)
Operator
Interface
24 (0.94)
5 (0.2)
5.5 (0.22)
Front Entry
20.5
40
(0.81) (1.57)
52
(2.05)
15.75 (0.62)
Logic
46 (1.81)
7 (0.28)
Mounting Holes
for M5 Screws
8 (0.31)
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-26
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-27
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
Trojan™ 5 & 6
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Trojan 5
Trojan 6
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2 N.C. & 2 N.O.
3 N.C. & 1 N.O.
General
Description
Contact Configuration
15
10 4.8
0mm
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
12
Safety A
21
22
Safety B
33
34
Aux A
31
32
Safety C
43
44
Aux B
43
44
Aux A
5.2
20
10 4.5
0mm
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
20
15
10 4.5
20
0mm
15
4.0
1-Safety A
3-NA
MBB
—
—
—
—
4-Safety B
—
2-NA
1-Aux A
—
4-Safety B
7-Aux A
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
Safety A
—
—
Safety B
—
—
Aux
—
—
Grey
Red
—
Safety A
—
Yellow
Pink
—
Safety B
—
White
Blue
—
Aux A
—
Green
Brown
—
NA
—
Green
Red/Yellow
0mm
4.0
MBB
3-NA
8-Safety A
Red
4.5
3-Interlock
Switches
5-Pin Micro (M12) for
ArmorBlock Guard I/O
Red/Blue
10
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
Aux B
2-Safety A
5-Safety B
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
4.5
1-Safety A
5-Safety A
6-Pin Cordset
889R-F6ECA-1
4.0 0mm
BBM
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Aux B
4-Aux A
Red/Black
10
6-Safety B
2-Safety B
3-Aux A
Red/White
15
3.8
MBB
8-Pin Micro (M12)
20
BBM
4.2
6-Pin Micro (M12)
3.2 0mm
Operator
Interface
Closed
Open
15
10
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
Aux A
BBM
20
15
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Aux B
Logic
Contact Action
11
Safety B
Aux A
34
20
Safety A
22
Safety B
22
33
12
21
1-
21
11
Safety A
12
2-Opto-electronics
11
Power
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-27
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-28
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/
EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load
PFHD: > 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable
for performance levels Ple or Pld
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for
use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according
to IEC 62061) depending on application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, TÜV, and CCC
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The MT-GD2 family is a robust, tongue-operated (or key-operated)
safety-interlock switch designed to fit at the leading edge of sliding,
hinged or lift-off guards. With its dual entry slots and rotatable head,
the MT-GD2 can offer eight different options for actuator entry.
The MT-GD2 features a compact housing of only 117 x 40 x 43 mm
(4.60 x 1.57 x 1.69 in.) with DIN 50041 standard fixing centres and
includes forced guided contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism.
Outputs
Safety Contacts Standard: 3 N.C. or 2 N.C. direct
opening action
Snap acting: 2 N.C. direct opening
forced disconnection
Auxiliary Contacts
Standard: 1 N.O. or 2 N.O.
Snap Acting: 2 N.O.
3-Interlock
Switches
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
The MT-GD2 is available with a variety of contact configurations
enabling it to be used as part of a system for higher-risk
applications. Operation of the switch is achieved by the insertion of
the specially-profiled stainless-steel actuator which should be
permanently fixed to the leading edge of the guard door. An optional
flexible actuator allows the MT-GD2 to operate on smaller-radii
doors (≥60 mm) and a flat actuator gives additional mounting
options, for example, on a chain.
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Standard—DC-13
(Ue) 24V
A style incorporating a latch release mechanism allows manual
retention of the actuator in the switch until the release mechanism is
manually activated.
Snap-Acting—A300/AC-15
(Ue) 240V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3A
6A
(le) 2 A
(le) 3 A
Snap-Acting—DC-13
120V
6A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Operating Characteristics
Features
Operator
Interface
Strong and versatile, can be used in most applications
Eight possible actuator entry points, easy to install
Variety of contact configurations
Snap acting MT-GD2 gives a min. break contact force of 40 N
Optional latch release styles
Industry standard fixing centers to DIN/EN50041
MT-GD2 Latch Release Style
Break Contact Force, Min.
BBM & MBB: 12 N (2.7 lbf)
BBM & Extended Flat Actuator: 32 N
(7.2 lbf)
Snap acting: 40 N (9.0 lbf)
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1 x 106 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+80° (-4…+176°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Painted zinc
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Logic
Weight [g (lb)]
520 (1.15)
Color
Yellow or Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-28
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-29
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Cat. No.
BBM
Actuator
Type
M20
—
440K-MT55002
GD2
440K-MT55074
Standard
1 N.O.
BBM
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
440K-MT55095
—
—
440K-MT55029
440K-MT55096
—
—
440K-MT55100
440K-MT55004
440K-MT55088
440K-MT55005
440K-MT55086 440K-MT55097
GD2
Standard
440K-MT55076
440K-MT55026
Fully
Flexible
440K-MT55077
440K-MT55087
—
440K-MT55006
440K-MT55089 440K-MT55101
—
—
—
—
440K-M22ANDT 440K-M22ANDL
440K-M21ANDH
440K-M2NNNDS
—
—
440K-M21BNDH
—
440K-MT55098
—
—
440K-MT55099
—
—
Extende
440K-M22AEDM 440K-M22AEDT
d Flat
—
—
—
GD2
440K-M22ASDM 440K-M22ASDT
Standard
—
—
—
Fully
440K-M22ABDM 440K-M22ABDT
Flexible
—
—
—
—
440K-MT55039
440K-MT55062 440K-MT55042
—
—
GD2
Standard
440K-MT55078
440K-MT55041 440K-MT55070
—
—
Fully
Flexible
440K-MT55079
440K-MT55045 440K-MT55103
—
—
—
440K-MT55082
440K-MT55091 440K-MT55106
—
—
—
440K-MT55063
440K-MT55065 440K-MT55066 440K-M21BNDH-N5 440K-M2NNNDS-N5
MBB
MT-GD2 Latch
Release
440K-MT55022
—
MBB
3 N.C.
—
—
2 N.O.
Snap
Acting
—
440K-MT55075
MT-GD2
2 N.C.
440K-MT55085 440K-MT55094
12-Pin M23
Fully
Flexible
MBB
BBM
8-Pin Micro
(M12)
1/2 in NPT
1-
1 N.O.
Action
GD2
440K-MT55080
Standard
Fully
Flexible
—
MBB
440K-MT55104
—
—
440K-MT55081
440K-MT55051 440K-MT55052
—
—
440K-MT55083
440K-MT55092 440K-MT55105 440K-M21MNDH-N5
440K-MT55050
—
Operator
Interface
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
1 With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details.
With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details.
Yellow Body Switches
Cat. No.
Contact
Conduit
Type
Safety
Auxiliary
Action
MT-GD2
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
Snap Acting
—
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
MBB
Actuator Type
1/2 in NPT
2-Opto-electronics
3 N.C.
Auxiliary
Connect to
ArmorBlock Guard
I/O 5-Pin Micro
(M12)1
3-Interlock
Switches
Safety
Type
Connector§
Connector§
12-Pin M23
5-Pin Micro
(M12)1
—
440K-M22ANYT
—
—
Extended Flat
440K-M22AEYT
440K-M22AEYL
440K-M2NAEYS
—
440K-M22MNYT-N5
—
440K-M2NNNYS-N5
Power
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
1 With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details.
With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See Typical Wiring Diagram on page 3-32 for wiring details.
Logic
Conduit
Contact
General
Product Selection
Red Body Switches
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-29
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-30
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
General
Single-Function Safety Relays
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-22
440R-N23117
1 N.O. Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-74
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-78
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-94
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-98
440R-W23218
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
12-Opto-electronics
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see the Safety Relays section (page 5-8) of this catalog.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see the Programmable Safety System section (page 5-107) of this catalog.
For application and wiring diagrams, see the Safety Applications section (page 10-1) of this catalog.
Connection Systems
Description
4-Pin Micro (M12)
5-Pin Micro (M12)
8-Pin Micro (M12)
12-Pin M23
889D-F4AC-1
—
889D-F8AB-1
889M-FX9AE-1
Patchcord
889D-F4ACDM-
889D-F5ACDM-1
889D-F8ABDM-
—
Distribution Box
898D-P4‡LT-DM4
—
—
—
898D-41LU-DM
—
—
—
898D-43LY-D4
—
—
—
Cordset
Shorting Plug
T-Port
3-Interlock
Switches
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports.
Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-30
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-31
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Dimensions
Cat. No.
GD2 standard actuator
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
3-51
440K-A11112
Fully flex actuator
3-50
440G-A27143
Sliding bolt actuator
3-55
440G-A27163
Extended flat actuator
3-51
440K-A17116
Dust Cover
—
440K-A17180
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Description
General
Accessories
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
3-Interlock
Switches
MT-GD2 Latch Release
119 (4.68)
118.5 (4.66)
MT-GD2
60 (2.36)
8.75
(0.34)
11.5 (0.45)
4 x M5
40 (1.57)
30 (1.18)
22 (0.86)
5 (0.2)
38 (1.5)
20.5
(0.81)
40 (1.57)
30 (1.18)
10.5 (0.41)
60 (2.36)
102.4 (4.03)
24.6 (0.97)
20.5 (0.81)
8.75 (0.34)
1 x M20, 1 x 1/2" NPT
9.2 (0.36)
5 (0.2)
30.8 (1.21)
74.6 (2.93)
51 (2.0)
67.6 (2.66)
43 (1.69)
40.7 (1.6)
30.8 (1.21)
43 (1.69)
9.2 (0.36)
5 (0.2)
30.8 (1.21)
116.5 (4.59)
1 x M20, 1 x 1/2" NPT
Operator
Interface
10.5 (0.41)
20.5 (0.81)
8.75 (0.34)
Power
Logic
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-31
03-SafetySw_1_Tongue:03-SafetySw1 Tng.qxd
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-32
Safety Switches
Tongue Switches
MT-GD2
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Description
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2 N.C. & 2 N.O.
General
33
21 11
43 33 21 11
34
22
44 34 22 12
3 N.C. & 1 N.O.
43 31 21 11
12
44 32 22 12
Contact Configuration
15
10
5.2
Contact Action
20
0 mm
15
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
Aux A
Safety A (NC)
Safety B (NC)
Aux A (NO)
Aux B (NO)
Safety A (NC)
Safety B (NC)
Aux A (NO)
20
10
5.4
15
10
5.4
1-
5.6
6.0
6.0
BBM
20
15
BBM
10
6
20
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Aux B
15
10
2-Opto-electronics
Closed
0 mm
5.2
MBB
7
—
5.6
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
Aux A
5.3
Open
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
Aux A
BBM
—
20
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Aux B
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
MBB
5.5
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Aux B
—
6.5
Snap Acting
2-Safety A
5-Safety B
5-Pin Micro (M12) for Connection to
ArmorBlock Guard I/O
—
1-Safety A
3-Interlock
Switches
3-NA
4-Safety B
3-Ground
8-Safety A
8-Pin Micro (M12)
—
2-N/A
1-Aux A
—
4-Safety B
7-Aux A
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
12-Pin Cordset
9
8
12
1
10
—
Safety A
Safety A
Safety A
4 and 6
Safety B
Safety B
Safety B
7 and 8
NC
Aux A
Safety C
9 and 10
Aux A
Aux B
Aux A
12
Ground
Ground
Ground
Grey
Red
—
Safety A
—
Yellow
Pink
—
Safety B
—
2
7
Operator
Interface
1 and 3
6
3
11
5
4
Pins 2, 5 and 11 are
not connected.
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
Logic
12-Pin Cordset
889M-FX9AE-1
Power
White
Blue
—
Aux A
—
Green
—
Ground
—
Brown
—
Not Used
—
Brown
Blue
Safety A
Safety A
Safety A
White
Green
Safety B
Safety B
Safety B
Yellow
Grey
Not Used
Aux A
Safety C
Pink
Red
Aux A
Aux B
Aux A
Green/Yellow
Ground
Ground
Ground
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-32
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-33
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
Overview
Typical Sequence of Actions
Guard locking switches are used to protect hazardous areas where
a danger is not immediately removed after a stop request. On many
machines removal of power of the motor or actuator will not
necessarily cause a reliable and immediate stopping of the
dangerous motion. Typical applications are: high inertia rotating
machines, fast rotating machines, and machines where high
pressure needs to be released from pneumatic valves.
1. The operator requests to enter the hazardous area
2. A controlled or immediate stop of the machine is initiated
3. The machine is stopped: time delay expired or stop motion
detected
4. The gate is unlocked by either energizing (Power to Release) or
de-energizing (Power to Lock) the solenoid
5. The operator opens the gate and works in the hazardous area
6. The operator exits the hazardous area and closes the gate
7. The operator restarts the machine
8. The gate is locked by either de-energizing (Power to Release) or
energizing (Power to Lock) the solenoid
9. The machine returns to its normal speed
Flexible Release
E-Stop
Power to Lock
When power is applied to the solenoid, the tongue is locked in the
switch. When power is removed, the lock is released allowing the
tongue to be extracted from the switch.
Restart
Restart
Power to Release
Power is not applied to
When the power is
the switch all the time,
removed from the cell
only when the door
after a “controlled stop,”
needs to be opened.
the doors unlock
Sudden lose of power
allowing maintenance
does not compromise
personnel to go in easily. safety of personnel, as
the doors stay closed.
Sudden lose of power
will unlock the door
allowing personnel to go
in the hazardous area
and the machine may
not be stopped.
Disadvantage
Loss of power will not
unlock the door and
maintenance personnel
will not be able to go
inside the cell.
Different methodologies can help decrease the risk that the danger
is removed before the operator has access to the hazardous area:
Time based
The risk assessment process and stop time measurement will
determine the maximum time for the machine to stop from its
normal speed of operation. This time defines the delay between the
request to open the gate and the authorization to access the zone
by unlocking the gate by energizing (Power to Release) or deenergizing (Power to Lock) the solenoid.
This time delay can be implemented by using any of our time delay
units such as the MSR178 or MSR138 safety relay or by software in
one of our Safety PLC.
Stop motion
Another methodology is to measure when the motion is stopped.
When the no-motion is detected, the lock is released to allow
personnel to enter the hazardous zone.
The CU2, CU3, or MSR57 safety relay will be used to detect the
motion is stopped.
Safe speed conditions
In some applications, the user may need access while the machine
is running at a safe speed. The MSR57P used with encoder
technology can handle this application. It will verify the speed of the
motion and allow access only if the speed does not exceed a
preconfigured limit or otherwise the machine will enter a stop
condition.
Guard Locking Gate
Switch
Rear Escape
In the situation where a person is still in the hazardous area, the
door is locked and the machine restarts, the TLS guard locking
switch product family provides two options for the person to escape
the hazard (in addition of an Emergency Stop located outside of the
hazardous area):
Option 1: Rear Escape (Not Latched)
A 40 mm push button is mounted on the back of the TLS and is
accessible from the inside of the cell. Pushing the rear escape push
button releases the lock mechanism inside the TLS guard locking
switch allowing the door to be opened, the machine to stop and the
person to escape the hazardous area.
Option 2: Flexible Release (Latched)
The flexible release push button accessory is designed to be
installed inside the hazardous area to provide a means of escape for
personnel who become trapped there. It provides remote access to
the manual release mechanism within the TLS-GD2 switch in the
event of an emergency situation. The flexible release can be retrofitted to existing TLS1-GD2 and TLS3-GD2 switches or installed
along with a new switch.
The unit is installed at an accessible height next to the guard door,
inside the guarded area, while the TLS-GD2 can be mounted
outside the guarded area. The flexible release is available with either
a 1 m (3.28 ft) or a 3 m (9.84 ft) cable.
Pushing the black button on the flexible release, the movement of
the cable activates the release mechanism within the switch,
allowing the door to be opened, the machine to stop and the person
to escape the hazardous area. The flexible release is then reset
using the blue reset handle.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
3-Interlock
Switches
E-Stop
Why Use Power to Lock or Power to Release?
Advantage
2-Opto-electronics
Restart
Power to Release
When power is applied to the solenoid the lock is released allowing
the tongue to be extracted from the switch. When power is
removed, the tongue is locked in the switch.
Power to Lock
1-
Manual Override
Operator
Interface
Rockwell Automation offers two different types of guard locking
switches:
Logic
Guard locking switches use a solenoid to activate a lock which
blocks or releases the tongue from the switch.
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-33
Power
Gates protected with guard locking switches are usually opened on
exception basis. For example: to clear a jam or to regularly maintain
the machine. This type of switch should not be used for frequent
access during normal operation of the machine.
General
Overview
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-34
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
Overview
Selection Guide
440G-MT
TLS1-GD2
TLS2-GD2
TLS3-GD2
Atlas 5
General
Product
1-
Holding Force
1600 N (360 lb)
2000 N (450 lb)
Housing Material
Metal
Plastic
5000 N (1124 lb)
Locking Mechanism
Power to Release
Power to Release
Power to Lock
Power to Release
Power to Release
Escape Release
None
Rear Escape and
Flexible Release
None
Rear Escape and
Flexible Release
None
Metal
Safety Contacts
2 N.C.
3 N.C.
2 N.C.
2 N.C.
Aux Contacts
2 N.O.
1 N.O.
1 N.O.
1 N.O.
Solenoid Monitoring
Direct Drive
1 N.O. & 1 N.C.
2 N.C.
2 N.C.
2-Opto-electronics
Typical Sequence of Actions and Contact Status
Step
Step 1—Hazardous Area Protected
Step 2—Access to Hazardous Area
Authorized
3-Interlock
Switches
Step 3—Access Authorized AND Door
Open
Step 4—Gate Ready to Be Locked
Operator
Interface
Step 5—Door Locked and Hazardous Area
Protected
440G-MT
TLS1
TLS2
TLS3
Atlas 5
Solenoid Power
De-energized
De-energized
Energized
De-energized
De-energized
Solenoid Feedback A/B
Not Available
Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Closed/Closed
Closed/Closed
Safety A/B
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Aux A (/B1)
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open/Open
Solenoid Power
Energized
Energized
De-energized
Energized
Energized
Solenoid Feedback A/B
Not Available
Open/Closed
Closed/Open
Open/Open
Open/Open
Safety A/B
Open 1
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Aux A (/B )
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Open/Closed
Solenoid Power
Energized
Energized
De-energized
Energized
Energized
Solenoid Feedback A/B
Not Available
Open/Closed
Closed/Open
Open/Open
Open/Open
Safety A/B
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Aux A (/B1)
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open/Closed
Solenoid Power
De-energized
De-energized
Energized
De-energized
De-energized
Solenoid Feedback A/B
Not Available
Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Closed/Closed
Closed/Closed
Safety A/B
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Aux A (/B1)
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed/Open
Solenoid Power
De-energized
De-energized
Energized
De-energized
De-energized
Solenoid Feedback A/B
Not Available
Closed/Open
Open/Closed
Closed/Closed
Closed/Closed
Safety A/B
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Aux A (/B1)
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open/Open
1 Direct drive of the contacts from the solenoid forces the safety contact to open even if the door is closed.
Logic
Aux B solenoid auxiliary contact is available only on the Atlas 5 safety switch.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-34
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-35
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
Overview
Application Example
General
E-Stop
1-
Restart
E-Stop
Guard Locking
Switch
Operating Conditions
Remarks
The door is closed and locked with a 440G-MT safety switch.
The robot is running.
The GuardShield light curtain is muted when the robot is away
from the assembly table.
The safety mats are in place to avoid the machine restarting when
the door is closed and the maintenance person is still in the
hazardous area. Without the safety mats a Flexible Release can be
mounted inside the hazardous area to unlock the door if this
situation was to happen.
The push of any E-Stop push buttons will stop the robot and the
conveyor immediately (Immediate stop).
Maintenance Conditions
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
In order to clear the jam safely, the operator requests to unlock the
door by activating the Open push button.
The control system (MSR safety relay or SmartGuard 600) shuts
down the robot and conveyor when the process conditions allow
the robot and conveyor to be stopped without damaging the
machine or the products (Controlled stop).
When the robot and conveyor are stopped the control system
allows the door to unlock by applying power to the solenoid in the
440G-MT safety switch.
The maintenance person opens the door and clears the jam.
When the task is done, the maintenance person exits the area,
closes the door and activates the Restart push button.
The control system restarts the robot and conveyor.
3-Interlock
Switches
2-Opto-electronics
Open
Restart
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-35
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-36
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
440G-MT
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/
EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1
May be suitable for use in Cat 3 or Cat 4
systems depending on the architecture
and application characteristics
Functional Safety Data (related to
Safety Contacts) 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load
PFHD: < 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
May be suitable for use in performance
levels Ple or Pld systems (according to
ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2
or SIL3 systems (according to IEC
62061) depending on the architecture
and application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, TÜV, and CCC
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The 440G-MT solenoid switch is a positive mode, tongue operated
guard locking interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed
until power is isolated while the guard is open. The guard may only
be opened when a signal is applied to the internal solenoid which
releases the lock mechanism. The 440G-MT locking mechanism is
designed to withstand forces up to 1600 N (360 lb) and the die-cast
alloy housing is ideal for use in harsh environments.
The 440G-MT solenoid switch is designed for machines that do not
stop immediately or where premature interruption of the machine
could cause damage to tooling and components or cause an
additional hazard.
3-Interlock
Switches
A 24V DC enhanced version is available with diagnostic output,
which may be used by a control system to indicate whether a guard
door is open or shut independently of the lock mechanism status. A
built in LED further visually indicates the status of the switch as
“door open,” “door shut and unlocked,” and “door shut and
locked.”
This enhanced version is supplied with a metal manual override key
to more easily enable manual unlocking in conditions when power is
not available to electrically unlock the switch.
Outputs
Safety Contacts 3 N.C. or 2 N.C. direct opening action
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O. or 2 N.O.
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
DC-13
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3A
6A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Solenoid Characteristics
Locking Type
Power to Release
Holding Force, Max.
1600 N (360 lb)
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC
Solenoid Power
13 W typical 100% ED
Operating Characteristics
Break Contact Force, Min.
6 N (1.35 lbf)
Operator
Interface
Features
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Mechanical lock
High locking force—1600 N (360 lb)
Heavy-duty die-cast alloy housing, ideal for harsh environments
Diagnostic version available
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Operating Radius, Min
60 mm (2.36 in.)
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1,000,000 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-25…+60° (13…+140°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Painted zinc alloy
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
1400 (3.08)
Color
Red
Logic
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data is based on the B10d
value given and:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-36
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-37
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
440G-MT
Product Selection
Contact
1 N.O.
Action
BBM
24V AC/DC
2 N.C.
24V DC with
diagnostic
function and
metal override
key
3 N.C.
2 N.C.
3 N.C.
2 N.O.
1 N.O.
2 N.O.
1 N.O.
BBM
BBM
BBM
BBM
110V AC/DC
2 N.C.
230V AC/DC
2 N.O.
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
Actuator Type
M20
Connector§
1/2 inch NPT
12-Pin M23
8-Pin Micro (M12)♣
GD2 standard
440G-MT47037 440G-MT47039 440G-MT47041 440G-M3NBGDH-AC
Fully-flexible
440G-MT47038 440G-MT47040 440G-MT47042 440G-M3NBBDH-AC
—
440G-MT47007 440G-MT47008 440G-MT47043
⎯
GD2 standard
440G-MT47044 440G-MT47046 440G-MT47048
⎯
Fully-flexible
440G-MT47045 440G-MT47047 440G-MT47049
⎯
—
440G-MT47010 440G-MT47011 440G-MT47050
⎯
GD2 standard
440G-MT47149 440G-MT47150 440G-MT47151
⎯
Fully flexible
440G-MT47152 440G-MT47153 440G-MT47154
⎯
No actuator
440G-MT47155 440G-MT47156 440G-MT47157
⎯
GD2 standard
440G-MT47158 440G-MT47159 440G-MT47160
⎯
Fully flexible
440G-MT47161 440G-MT47162 440G-MT47163
⎯
No actuator
440G-MT47164 440G-MT47165 440G-MT47166
⎯
GD2 standard
440G-MT47070 440G-MT47073
⎯
⎯
Fully-flexible
440G-MT47071 440G-MT47074
⎯
⎯
—
440G-MT47013 440G-MT47009
⎯
⎯
GD2 standard
440G-MT47077 440G-MT47079
⎯
⎯
Fully-flexible
440G-MT47078 440G-MT47080
⎯
⎯
—
440G-MT47012 440G-MT47014
⎯
⎯
—
440G-MT47016 440G-MT47017
⎯
⎯
—
440G-MT47015 440G-MT47024
⎯
⎯
BBM
General
3 N.C.
Auxiliary
1-
Safety
2-Opto-electronics
Solenoid
Voltage
Cat. No.
M20 Conduit
§ For connector ratings see page 3-9.
♣ With an 8-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-39 for wiring details.
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary
Outputs
Time Delay
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
Single-Function Safety Relays
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
—
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid
State
1 N.O. Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
2 N.C.
0.5 s…30 min
Removable
Automatic
24V AC/DC,
115V AC or
230V AC
5-40
440R-M23227
Specialty Safety Relays
MSR178
3 N.O.
CU2
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
0.1 s…40 min
Fixed
—
24V AC/DC
5-56
440R-S07281
CU3
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Fixed
Automatic/Manual
110V AC
5-64
440R-S35002
Operator
Interface
Description
3-Interlock
Switches
Recommended Logic Interfaces
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2
PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from
the base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR300 Series
MSR310P Base
Output
Modules
3 PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
2 PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
—
24V DC from
the base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
—
Logic
Modular Safety Relays
Power
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-37
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-38
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
440G-MT
Connection Systems
Description
General
Cordset
Patchcord
8-Pin Micro
12-Pin M23
889D-F8AB-1
889M-F12AH-1
889D-F8ABDM- 889M-F12AHMU-‡
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 0M3, (0.3 m), 0M6 (0.6 m), 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m) or 3 (3 m) for standard lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Accessories
Description
Dimensions
Cat. No.
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
440K-A11112
1-
GD2 standard actuator
2-Opto-electronics
Fully flex actuator
440G-A27143
3-50
Sliding bolt actuator
440G-A27163
Extended flat actuator
440K-A17116
Replacement Cover, No LED,
No Override Key
440G-MT47120
—
3-Interlock
Switches
Replacement Cover, LED,
Override Key
440G-MT47123
Emergency Override Key
(See Warning below.)
—
440G-A36026
Dust Cover
—
440K-A17180
WARNING: Do not attach the Emergency Override Key to the 440G-MT switch.
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
145 (5.71)
5 (0.19)
Logic
46 (1.81)
15.5 (0.61)
199 (7.83)
9.2 (0.36)
40.7 (1.60)
46.75 (1.84)
20.5 (0.80)
38 (1.49)
40 (1.57)
30 (1.18)
4 x M5
8.75 (.034)
Operator
Interface
Approximate Dimensions
Power
23 (0.90)
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-38
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-39
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
440G-MT
Typical Wiring Diagrams
3 N.C. & 1 N.O.
General
2 N.C. & 2 N.O.
Contact Configuration
Solenoid
Solenoid
Power
Safety A (NC)
Safety B (NC)
Aux A (NO)
Aux B (NO)
A1
12
22
34
44
A2
A1
11
12
21
22
31
32
43
44
Power
Safety A (NC)
Safety B (NC)
Safety C (NC)
Aux A (NO)
1-
A2
11
21
33
43
0 mm
6
12
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
Aux A
Contact Action
0 mm
6
3.5
Open
Closed
3.5
BBM
8-Pin Micro (M12)
BBM
2-Power
1-Aux A
3-Aux A
8-Safety A
4-Safety B
—
7-power
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
12-Pin M23 QD
9
1
10
2
7
Solenoid Power
Safety A
7 and 8
Safety B
Safety B
2 and 5
Aux A
Safety C
9 and 10
Aux B
Aux A
3
11
5
Safety A
4
Pin 11 not connected.
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
12-Pin Cordset
889M-F12AH-1
Grey/Pink not connected.
12
Ground
Ground
Brown
Blue
—
Solenoid Power
Grey
Red
—
Safety A
Yellow
Pink
—
Safety B
White
Green
—
Aux A
Brown
Grey
Solenoid Power
Solenoid Power
Pink
Yellow
Safety A
Safety A
White
Red/Blue
Safety B
Safety B
Blue
Red
Aux A
Safety C
Black
Violet
Aux B
Aux A
Green
Ground
Ground
3-Interlock
Switches
6
Solenoid Power
4 and 6
Operator
Interface
12
1 and 3
Logic
8
2-Opto-electronics
12
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Aux B
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Diagnostic Version
Diagnostic Electrical Output
LED Output Matrix
Actuator
Voltage
Actuator
Solenoid Off
Solenoid On
In
0V DC
In
Green
Amber
Out
+24V DC
Out
Flashing Red
Red
Power
Electrical output independent of solenoid status. Maximum output is 100 mA.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-39
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-40
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
TLS-GD2
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Functional Safety Data (related to
Safety Contacts) 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load
PFHD: < 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
May be suitable for use in performance
levels Ple or Pld systems (according to
ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2
or SIL3 systems (according to IEC
62061) depending on the architecture
and application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, TÜV, and CCC
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The TLS-GD2 is a positive mode, tongue operated guard locking
interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is
isolated and ensures that it remains isolated while the guard is
open. It has three safety (N.C.) contacts and two auxiliary (N.O.)
contacts. The TLS-GD2 head has two entry slots and it can be
rotated to provide four actuator entry points. A blanking plug is
provided to seat the unused slot.
Outputs
3-Interlock
Switches
Operator
Interface
Safety Contacts (TLS-1 & -2) 3 N.C. direct opening action
(TLS-3) 4 N.C. direct opening action
Auxiliary Contacts
(TLS-1 & -2) 2 N.O. (1 solenoid
monitoring)
(TLS-3 1 N.O.)
The guard may only be opened when a signal is applied to the TLSGD2's internal solenoid which releases the lock mechanism. This
signal can be via CU1 electronic timer relays or CU2 stopped
motion detectors. Therefore the TLS-GD2 is ideal for machines
which do not stop immediately or where premature interruption of
the machine could cause damage to tooling and components or
cause an additional hazard.
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
The TLS-GD2 is available in three types. The TLS-1 GD2 and TLS-3
GD2 incorporate a power-to-release function. Two manual release
points with security screws allow the locked TLS-GD2 to be
released in emergencies. An optional lid-mounted key-release style
can also be supplied. The TLS-2 GD2 has a power-to-lock function.
Each type of switch has five sets of contacts of various forms and
are suitable for use with PLCs.
DC-13
The TLS-1 GD2 and TLS-3 GD2 are both available with escape
release options. They are intended for machine guarding with full
body access. The switch is installed so that the escape release
push button on the rear side is accessible from inside the hazardous
area. This allows the intentional unlocking of the TLS-GD2 from
inside a hazardous area, providing a means of escape for a person
who may become trapped.
Releasable Load, Max.
100 N (22.5 lbf)
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC
(solenoid)
Solenoid Power
Typically 7 W 100% ED
Escape Release Button
Force max.: 50 N (11.25 lbs)
A stainless-steel actuator guide is fitted to protect the unit from
actuator damage due to poor guard alignment or guard wear.
TLS-GD2 has an ingress protection rating of IP69K making it
suitable for harsh washdown applications as found in the food and
beverage, pharmaceutical, solar and semiconductor industries.
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3.0 A
6.0 A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Solenoid Characteristics
Locking Type
TLS-1 & -3 Power-to-Release TLS-2
Power-to-Lock
Holding Force, Max.
2000 N (450 lbf)
Operating Characteristics
Break Contact Force, Min.
20 N (4.5 lbf)
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
1 cycle/s
Operating Radius, Min
160 mm (6.3 in.) [80 mm (3.15 in.) with
flexible actuator]
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1,000,000 operations
Environmental
Logic
IMPORTANT: With the TLS-2 GD2 “power to
lock” style, provisions may be required to ensure
that a dangerous situation can not result from
open circuit faults or power cuts.
Enclosure Type Rating
IP66, IP67 and IP69K
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+60° (-4…+140°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Power
Features
Weight [g (lb)]
400 (0.88)
Power to release or power to lock
High locking force ≤2000 N (450 lb)
Five contacts: 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. for door position monitoring 1 N.C.
& 1 N.O. or 2 N.C. for lock monitoring
Rotatable head: 4 possible key entry slots
Conforms to EN 1088 & EN 60947-5-1
Escape Release version available
IP69K, suitable for high pressure, high temperature washdown
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data is based on the B10d
value given and:
- Usage rate of 1op/10mins., 24hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-40
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-41
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
TLS-GD2
Product Selection
Solenoid
Contacts
Voltage
24V AC/DC
TLS-1 GD2
Power to
Release
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
1 N.C. &
1 N.O.
110V
AC/DC
230V
AC/DC
24V AC/DC
TLS-2 GD2
Power to
Lock
TLS-3 GD2
Power to
Release
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
1 N.C. &
1 N.O.
110V
AC/DC
TLS-3 GD2
Power to
Release
with
Escape
Release
M20
12-Pin M23
8-Pin Micro (M12)♣
440G-T27121
⎯
440G-T27233
440G-T2NBBPH-1R
GD2
Standard
440G-T27251
440G-T27169
440G-T27234
⎯
Fully Flex
440G-T27252
440G-T27171
440G-T27235
⎯
—
440G-T27124
⎯
⎯
⎯
GD2
Standard
440G-T27253
440G-T27172
⎯
⎯
Fully Flex
440G-T27254
440G-T27174
⎯
⎯
—
440G-T27123
⎯
⎯
⎯
—
440G-T27127
⎯
440G-T27239
440G-T2NBBPH-1L
GD2
Standard
440G-T27255
440G-T27175
440G-T27240
⎯
Fully Flex
440G-T27256
440G-T27177
440G-T27241
⎯
—
440G-T27132
⎯
⎯
⎯
GD2
Standard
440G-T27257
440G-T27178
⎯
⎯
Fully Flex
440G-T27258
440G-T27180
⎯
⎯
230V
AC/DC
—
440G-T27129
⎯
⎯
⎯
—
440G-T27134
⎯
440G-T27245
440G-T2NBBPH-2R
24V AC/DC
GD2
Standard
440G-T27259
440G-T27181
440G-T27246
⎯
Fully Flex
440G-T27260
440G-T27183
440G-T27247
⎯
—
440G-T27138
⎯
⎯
⎯
GD2
Standard
440G-T27261
440G-T27184
⎯
⎯
Fully Flex
440G-T27262
440G-T27186
⎯
⎯
—
440G-T27136
⎯
⎯
⎯
2 N.C.
110V
AC/DC
230V
AC/DC
TLS-1 GD2
Power to
Release
with
Escape
Release
—
—
24V AC/DC
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
1 N.C. &
1 N.O.
110V
AC/DC
GD2
Standard
24V AC/DC
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
110V
AC/DC
440G-T21BNPM-1B 440G-T21BNPT-1B 440G-T21BNPL-1B 440G-T2NBNPH-1B
440G-T21BGPM-1B 440G-T21BGPT-1B 440G-T21BGPL-1B
⎯
—
440G-T21BNPM-4B 440G-T21BNPT-4B
⎯
⎯
GD2
Standard
440G-T21BGPM-4B 440G-T21BGPT-4B
⎯
⎯
—
2 N.C.
1-
Auxiliary
GD2
Standard
440G-T21BNPM-2B 440G-T21BNPT-2B 440G-T21BNPL-2B 440G-T2NBNPH-2B
440G-T21BGPM-2B 440G-T21BGPT-2B 440G-T21BGPL-2B
2-Opto-electronics
Safety
Connector§
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
3-Interlock
Switches
Type
Actuator
Type
General
Cat. No.
Conduit
⎯
—
440G-T21BNPM-5B 440G-T21BNPT-5B
⎯
⎯
GD2
Standard
440G-T21BGPM-5B 440G-T21BGPT-5B
⎯
⎯
Operator
Interface
Contacts
§ For connector ratings, see page 3-9.
♣ With an 8-pin micro connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-45 for wiring details.
WARNING:
Logic
To monitor independently the safety contact(s) and the solenoid feedback (TLS 1, 2 and 3):
• The 12-wire cordset 889M-F12AH-1 must be used
AND
• For the TLS1 and TLS2: the jumper between 12 and 41 must be removed
• For the TLS3: the jumpers between 12 and 41 and 22 and 51 must be removed
Monitoring of safety contact(s) and the solenoid feedback (in series) is available, when jumpers are in place:
• For the TLS1 and TLS2: by using pins 4 and 6 on the 12-pin, M23 receptacle or Pink and Yellow wires on the
12-wire cordset (889M-F12AH-1)
• For the TLS3: by using pins 4 and 6 and pins 7 and 8 on the 12-pin, M23 receptacle or Pink and Yellow and
White and Red/Blue wires on the 12-wire cordset (889M-F12AH-1)
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-41
Power
AND
WARNING:
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-42
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
TLS-GD2
Recommended Logic Interfaces
General
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary
Outputs
Time Delay
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
Single-Function Safety Relays
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
—
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid
State
1 N.O. Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
2 N.C.
0.5 s…30 min
Removable
Automatic
24V AC/DC,
115V AC or
230V AC
5-40
440R-M23227
Specialty Safety Relays
MSR178
3 N.O.
1CU2
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
0.1 s…40 min
Fixed
—
24V AC/DC
5-56
440R-S07281
CU3
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Fixed
Automatic/Manual
110V AC
5-64
440R-S35002
Modular Safety Relays
2-Opto-electronics
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2
PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from
the base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output
Modules
3 PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
—
24V DC from
the base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
3-Interlock
Switches
Connection Systems
Description
Cordset
Patchcord
8-Pin Micro
(M12)
12-Wire,
12-Pin M23
9-Wire,
12-Pin M23§
889D-F8AB-1
889M-F12AH-1
889M-FX9AE-1
889D-F8ABDM- 889M-F12AHMU-‡
—
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 0M3, (0.3 m), 0M6 (0.6 m), 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m) or 3 (3 m) for standard lengths.
§ The 9-wire cordset can be used only with the TLS3 versions.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-42
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-43
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
TLS-GD2
Dimensions
Cat. No.
GD2 standard actuator
3-50
440G-A27011
GD2 flat actuator
3-51
440K-A11112
Extended flat actuator
3-51
440K-A17116
Fully flex actuator
3-50
440G-A27143
Sliding bolt actuator not to be used with the Escape Release
3-55
440G-A27163
440G-A27140
440G-A27142
Cover for TLS-1 with override key attached for series D and earlier
440G-A27207
Cover for TLS-1 with external override key for series E and later
—
440G-A27208
440G-A27371
Cover for TLS-3 with external override key for series E and later
440G-A27372
Cover for TLS-1 with override key attached for series E and later
440G-A27373
Cover for TLS-3 with override key attached for series E and later
440G-A27374
Emergency Override Key
(See Warning below.)
—
Flexible Release—1 m (3.28 ft) Cable
Flexible Release—3 m (9.84 ft) Cable
440G-A36026
440G-A27356
3-54
440G-A27357
—
440K-A17183
Sliding Bolt
3-55
440K-AMDS
Mounting Plate
3-55
440K-AMDSSMPB
Logic
Dust Cover
Operator
Interface
Cover for TLS-3 with override key attached for series D and earlier
3-Interlock
Switches
Cover for TLS-1 with external override key for series D and earlier
Cover for TLS-3 with external override key for series D and earlier
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Description
General
Accessories
Power
WARNING: Do not attach the Emergency
Override Key to the TLS-GD2 switch.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-43
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-44
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
TLS-GD2
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
126 (4.96)
105 (4.13)
6 (0.24)
5 (0.2) 20.5
(0.81)
17
(0.67)
Optional
Lock Cover
22 (0.87)
27 (1.06)
39 (1.54)
14
(0.55)
3 (0.12)
25.5 (1)
5.5 (0.22)
5 (0.2)
21
(0.83)
9 (0.35)
14 (0.55)
33 (1.3)
General
43 (1.69)
6.5
(0.26) M5
6.5 (0.26)
5 (0.2)
21
(0.83)
73 (2.87)
86 (3.39)
57 (2.24)
1-
17
(0.67)
2 x M5
31.5 (1.24)
52.5 (2.07)
60.5 (2.38)
67.5 (2.66)
6.5 (0.26)
3 (0.12)
2-Opto-electronics
14.5 (0.57)
4 (0.16)
TLS-GD2 Escape Release
5 (0.19)
3.0 (0.11)
6.5 (0.25)
4 (0.15)
3-Interlock
Switches
Isometric View
17.0
(0.66)
85.0
(3.34)
21.0 (0.82)
73.0
(2.87)
24.0 (0.94) Dia.
14.5
(0.57)
31.4 (1.23)
52.0 (2.04)
60.0 (2.36)
67.0 (2.63)
3.0 (0.11)
Operator
Interface
43.0 (1.69)
21.0 (0.82)
23.5 (0.92)
17.25 (0.67)
This detail in key
release only
125.0 (4.92)
6.0 (0.23)
104.0 (4.09) max.
20.5 (0.80)
37.0 41.0
27.0 (1.45) (1.61)
(1.06)
33.0 (1.29)
14.0 (0.55)
25.5 (1.0)
Logic
14.0 (0.55)
9.0 (0.35)
5.0 (0.19)
3.25 (0.12)
5.5 (0.21)
65.25 (2.56)
Without Handle
75.0 (2.95)
9.75 (0.38)
39.0 (1.53)
Dia.
41.15 (1.62)
Power
45.0
(1.77)
40.0 (1.57)
Dia.
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-44
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-45
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
TLS-GD2
Typical Wiring Diagrams
TLS3
Solenoid
Solenoid
11
12
A2
A1
21
22
42
41
33
34
54
53
Power
Solenoid A (NC)
Solenoid B (NO)
Jumper between 12 & 41
20
6
Closed
A2
A1
Power
Safety B (NC)
AUX A (NO)
21
22
42
41
33
34
51
52
Solenoid A (NC)
Solenoid B (NC)
Jumper between 12 & 41 and 22 & 51
20
Solenoid A
Solenoid B
Aux A
Safety A
Safety B
Solenoid A
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Solenoid B
BBM
BBM
20
6 4
BBM
3-Solenoid A
3-Solenoid A
8-Safety A
2-Power
1-Solenoid A
4-Safety B
8-Pin Micro (M12)
7-Power
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
9
8
12
1
10
2
7
6
3
11
5
4
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
2-Power
8-Safety A &
Solenoid A
1-Solenoid A
7-Power
4-Safety B &
Solenoid B
5-Safety A &
Solenoid A
No jumper on 12-41.
12-Pin M23
0 mm
6-Safety B &
Solenoid B
Jumper on 12-41 and 22-51.
1 and 3
Solenoid Power
1 and 3
4 and 12
Safety A 4 and 12
Solenoid Power
Safety A 7 and 8
Safety B
7 and 5
Safety B 9 and 10
Aux A
9 and 10
Aux A
6 and 11
Solenoid A 6 and 11
Solenoid A 2 and 5
Solenoid B
2 and 8
Solenoid B Brown
Blue
Solenoid Power
Solenoid Power
Grey
Red
Safety A
Safety A & Solenoid A
Yellow
Pink
Safety B
Safety B & Solenoid B
White
Green
Solenoid A
Solenoid A
Brown
Blue
Solenoid Power
White
Green
Safety A & Solenoid A
Yellow
Grey
Safety B & Solenoid B
Pink
Red
Aux A
Solenoid Power
Brown
Grey
Solenoid Power
Pink
Green
Safety A Pink
Green
Safety A White
Red/Blue
Safety B
White
Red
Safety B Black
Violet
Aux A
Black
Violet
Aux A
Grey/Pink
Yellow
Solenoid A Grey/Pink
Yellow
Solenoid A Blue
Red
Solenoid B
Blue
Red/Blue
Solenoid B 12-Pin, 9-Wire Cordset
889M-FX9AE-1
Can not be used.
Pink/Yellow: Not connected
Brown
Grey
12-Pin, 12-Wire Cordset
889M-F12AH-1
Logic
Open
12
Power
Contact Action
11
3.0
Lock Point
6
0 mm
4 0 mm
Solenoid A
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Solenoid B
Safety A (NC)
1-
Safety A (NC)
Safety B (NC)
AUX A (NO)
3-Interlock
Switches
Contact Configuration
General
TLS2
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
See WARNING notes on page 3-41.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
2-Opto-electronics
TLS1
Operator
Interface
Red Switches
3-45
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:19 PM
Page 3-46
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
Atlas™ 5
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Functional Safety Data (related to
Safety Contacts) 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load
PFHD: < 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
May be suitable for use in performance
levels Ple or Pld systems (according to
ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2
or SIL3 systems (according to IEC
62061) depending on the architecture
and application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, CSA, and TÜV
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Atlas 5 is a positive-mode, tongue-operated guard-locking
interlock switch that locks a machine guard closed until power is
isolated to ensure that it remains isolated while the guard is open. A
heavy-duty switch, the Atlas 5 locking mechanism is designed to
withstand forces up to 5000 N (1124 lb) and the die-cast alloy
housing is ideal for use in harsh environments. A unique feature of
the Atlas 5 is a patented self-aligning head that tolerates actuator or
guard misalignment, making it particularly useful for heavy machine
guards.
The Atlas 5 is designed for machines that do not stop immediately
or where premature interruption of the machine could cause
damage to tooling and components or cause an additional hazard.
With 2 safety (N.C.) contacts and 2 auxiliary (N.O.) contact, Atlas 5
is ideal for PLC controlled machines.
Outputs
Safety Contacts Atlas 5: 2 N.C. direct opening action; 1
N.O. direct opening action
Atlas 5 trapped key (left hand): 2 N.C.
direct opening action; 1 N.O. direct
opening action
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Thermal Current Ilth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min. 5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
AC-15
(Ue) 240V
(le) 1.5 A
3-Interlock
Switches
Features
DC-13
Mechanical lock
High locking force—5000 N (1124 lb)
Heavy duty die-cast alloy housing ideal for harsh environments
Patented self-aligning head tolerates actuator misalignment
120V
3A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Solenoid Characteristics
Locking Type
Power to Release
Holding Force, Max.
5000 N (1124 lbf)
Power Supply
24V AC/DC or 110V AC or 230V AC
(solenoid)
Solenoid Power
13 W typical 100% ED
Operating Characteristics
Operator
Interface
Break Contact Force, Min.
12 N (2.7 lbf)
Actuation Speed, Max.1
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Operating Radius, Min
300 mm end entry, 800 mm entry front
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1,000,000 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP65
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+60° (+14…+140°)
Physical Characteristics
Logic
Housing Material
Die-cast alloy
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
1200 (2.65)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data is based on the B10d
Power
value given and:
- Usage rate of 1op/10mins., 24hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-46
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-47
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
Atlas™ 5
Product Selection
Contact
Module Type
Actuator
Type
Safety
Solenoid
Contacts
Auxiliary
Solenoid
Voltage
M20
24V AC/DC
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
Connector§
12-Pin M23
110V AC/DC 440G-L07263 440G-L07257
Standard
Standard
2 N.C.
2 N.C. & 1
N.O.
1 N.O.
LH Key Lock
8-Pin Micro (M12)♣
440G-L07264 440G-L07258 440G-L07298 440G-L2NNSDH-3N
⎯
⎯
General
Cat. No.
M20 Conduit
⎯
⎯
440G-L07255 440G-L07249 440G-L07301 440G-L2NNSDH-38
230V AC/DC 440G-L07262 440G-L07256
24V AC/DC
110V AC/DC 440G-L07254 440G-L07248
⎯
⎯
230V AC/DC 440G-L07253 440G-L07247
⎯
⎯
1-
§ For connector ratings, see 3-9.
♣ With an 8-pin micro connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-49 for wiring details.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary
Outputs
Time Delay
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
1 N.C.
—
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
—
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
5-40
440R-M23227
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid
State
1 N.O. Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
2 N.C.
0.5 s…30 min
Removable
Automatic
24V AC/DC,
115V AC or
230V AC
Specialty Safety Relays
MSR178
3 N.O.
CU2
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
0.1 s…40 min
Fixed
—
24V AC/DC
5-56
440R-S07281
CU3
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
—
Fixed
Automatic/Manual
110V AC
5-64
440R-S35002
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2
PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from
the base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output
Modules
3 PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid
State
—
Removable
—
24V DC from
the base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
3-Interlock
Switches
3 N.O.
Operator
Interface
MSR127RP
2-Opto-electronics
Single-Function Safety Relays
Description
Cordset
Patchcord
8-Pin Micro
(M12)
12-Pin M23
889D-F8AB-1
889M-F12AH-1
Logic
Connection Systems
889D-F8ABDM- 889M-F12AHMU-‡
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Power
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 0M3, (0.3 m), 0M6 (0.6 m), 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m) or 3 (3 m) for standard lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-47
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-48
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
Atlas™ 5
Accessories
Description
General
Cat. No.
Standard actuator
3-50
440G-A07136
Atlas Replacement End Cap
—
440G-A07180
Fully flex actuator
3-50
440G-A07269
Dust Cover
—
440K-A17181
1-
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions
3 x M20
56 (2.2)
17 (0.67)
12 (0.47)
52 (2)
10 (0.39)
14 (0.55)
163 (6.4)
4 X M5
5 (0.2)
13 (0.51)
184 (7.24)
25 (0.98)
80 (3.15)
90 (3.54)
Operator
Interface
56 (2.2)
12 (0.47)
3-Interlock
Switches
23 (0.91)
56 (2.2)
30 (1.18)
3 x 1/2" NPT
5 (0.2)
2-Opto-electronics
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
5 (0.2)
16 (0.63)
Logic
25 (0.98)
95 (3.74)
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-48
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-49
Safety Switches
Guard Locking Switches
Atlas™ 5
Typical Wiring Diagrams
General
Atlas 5
E
A2
A1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Solenoid A
10 9
19 20
1-
Power
Contact Configuration
20
2.5
0mm
Contact Action
7.6
Open
Closed
2-Opto-electronics
Safety A
Safety B
Solenoid A
Aux A
4.9
BBM
3-Solenoid A
8-Safety A
2-Power
1-Solenoid A
4-Safety B
8-Pin Micro (M12)
7-Power
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
Jumpers on 9-10 and 19-20.
12
1
10
2
7
6
3
11
5
4
Pin 11 not connected.
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
12-Pin Cordset
889M-F12AH-1
Safety A
7 and 8
Safety B
2 and 5
Aux A
9 and 10
Solenoid A
12
Ground
Brown
Blue
Solenoid Power
Grey
Red
Safety A
Yellow
Pink
Safety B
White
Green
Solenoid A
Brown
Grey
Solenoid Power
Pink
Yellow
Safety A
White
Red/Blue
Safety B
Blue
Red
Aux A
Black
Violet
Solenoid A
Green
Ground
3-Interlock
Switches
9
8
Solenoid Power
4 and 6
Operator
Interface
1 and 3
Logic
12-Pin M23
Power
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-49
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-50
Safety Switches
Accessories
Actuators
Accessories for Interlock and Guard Locking Switches
Actuators1
General
Item
Description
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
Standard actuator
10.5 (0.41)
4 (0.16)
56 (2.2)
3.5 (0.14)
5 (0.2)
30 (1.18)
10 (0.39)
440G-A07136
50 (1.97)
5 (0.2)
2 x M5
M5
10 (0.39)
24 (0.94)
1-
18 (0.71)
90 (3.54)
77 (3.03)
75 (2.95)
9 (0.35)
21 (0.82)
440G-A07269
18 (0.7)
2-Opto-electronics
Fully flex actuator
M5
4 (0.16)
GD2 standard actuator
36 (1.42)
18
(0.71)
440G-A27011
3-Interlock
Switches
40 (1.57)
14.5
(0.57)
52 (2.05)
M5 CSK
3.5 (0.14)
18
(0.71)
6.8 (0.27)
13 (0.51)
19 (0.75)
51(2.01)
Operator
Interface
Fully flex actuator
31 (1.22
52 (2.05)
40 (1.57)
Adjusting
screws
2 x M3
8 (0.31)
20
(0.79)
440G-A27143
4 x Ø5.5
(0.22)
52 (20.5)
14.5
(0.57)
18
(0.71)
440K-A11094
Logic
25.5
(1.0)
4
(0.16)
11.2
(0.44)
52 (2.05)
1.5
(0.06)
Catch and Retainer Kit
7.25
(0.29)
29 (1.14)
40 (1.57)
1 See page 3-8 for Switch Compatibility table.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-50
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-51
Safety Switches
Accessories
Actuators
Actuators1 (continued)
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
3.5
(0.14)
Cat. No.
5 (0.2)
17.5
(0.69)
Standard actuator
14.5
(0.57)
440K-A11095
General
Description
31.2 (1.23)
Item
M5 CSK
40 (1.57)
52 (2.05)
3.5
(0.14)
440K-A11112
20.7 (0.81)
32.7 (1.29)
440K-A11115
52 (2.05)
3-Interlock
Switches
Replacement Alignment
Guide
20.7 (0.81)
8.5
(0.33)
20.7
(0.81)
Alignment guide with
semi-flexible actuator
46.5 (1.83)
32.7 (1.29)
35 29
32.7
(1.29)
55.5 (2.19)
52.0
(2.04)
14
(0.55)
440K-A11144
40 (1.57)
15.5
(0.61)
Operator
Interface
14 (0.55)
3.5
(0.14)
5 (0.2)
14.5
(0.57)
31.2 (1.23)
17.5
(0.69)
Standard actuator
440K-A11238
M5 CSK
40 (1.57)
3 (0.11)
32.2 (1.26)
440K-A17116
Ø5.2 (Ø0.2)
20
(0.78)
7 (0.27)
17.5
(0.69)
10.8 (0.42)
8 (0.31)
52 (2.05)
70 (2.75)
Extended flat actuator
2-Opto-electronics
35 (1.38)
29 (1.14)
36 (1.42)
Logic
GD2 flat actuator
25
(0.98)
57 (2.24)
1-
17.5
(0.69)
15 (0.59)
36 (1.41)
Power
1 See page 3-8 for Switch Compatibility table.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-51
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-52
Safety Switches
Accessories
Actuators
Actuators1 (continued)
Item
Description
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
24 (0.94)
8.75 (0.34)
7.5 (0.3)
440K-A21006
3 (0.12)
29 (1.14)
90° actuator, not to be
used with metal
alignment guide
18.25 (0.72)
8 (0.31)
General
23 (0.91)
M4
1 (0.04)
12
(0.47)
3 (0.12)
1-
12 (0.47)
3 (0.12)
M4
Flat actuator, not to be
used with metal
alignment guide
440K-A21014
2-Opto-electronics
15 (0.59)
25 (0.98)
14 (0.55)
8.5 (0.33)
Metal alignment guide
with semi-flexible
actuator
3-Interlock
Switches
15.5 (0.61)
440K-A21030
40 (1.57)
55.5 (2.19)
19 (0.75)
6
(0.24)
Metal Alignment Guide
40 (1.57)
12 (0.47)
3
(0.12)
440K-A21069
13.5
(0.53)
Operator
Interface
13 (0.51)
25 (0.98)
2 x M3
Alignment guide with
fully-flexible actuator
19 ().75)
51 (2.0)
13 (0.51)
18
(0.71)
440K-A27010
40 (1.57)
52 (2.05)
8 (0.31)
31 (1.22)
20 (0.79)
Logic
6.8 (0.27)
4 x Ø5.5 (Ø0.22)
1 See page 3-8 for Switch Compatibility table.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-52
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-53
Safety Switches
Accessories
Beacons, Bulbs and Conduits
Description
Cat. No.
Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Amber Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb
(Sold Separately)
440A-A19001
Indicator, M20 Conduit Pilot Light—Red Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb
(Sold Separately)
440A-A19002
Indicator, 1/2 inch NPT Conduit Pilot Light—Amber Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb
(Sold Separately)
440A-A19005
Indicator, 1/2 inch NPT Conduit Pilot Light—Red Lens T-3 1/4 Insert Use T-3 1/4 Bulb
(Sold Separately)
440A-A19007
Bulb, 24V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.8W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09056
Bulb, 110V for Conduit Pilot Light 2.6W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09055
Bulb, 240V for Conduit Pilot Light 0.75W T-3 1/4 Bulb, Miniature Screw Base
440A-A09054
Red LED Bulb, 24V AC/DC for Conduit Pilot Light
Bayonet Style Insert
800T-N319R
Amber LED Bulb, 24V AC/DC for Conduit Pilot Light
Bayonet Style Insert
800T-N319A
Red LED Bulb, 120V AC for Conduit Pilot Light
Bayonet Style Insert
800T-N320R
Amber LED Bulb, 120V AC for Conduit Pilot Light
Bayonet Style Insert
800T-N320A
Cat. No.
Blanking plug, M20 conduit
440A-A07265
Cable Grip, M16 Conduit, Accommodates Cable Diameter 4…7 mm (0.27…0.16 in.)
440A-A09004
Cable grip, M20 conduit, accommodates cable diameter 7…10.5 mm (0.27…0.41 in.)
440A-A09028
Adaptor, conduit, M20 to 1/2 inch NPT, plastic
440A-A09042
Adaptor, Conduit, 1/2 inch NPT to M16, Brass
440A-A09093
Adaptor, Conduit, M16 to 1/2 inch NPT, Brass
440A-A09094
3-Interlock
Switches
Description
Power
Logic
Item
Operator
Interface
Conduit Accessories
2-Opto-electronics
1-
Item
General
Beacons and Bulbs
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-53
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-54
Safety Switches
Accessories
Replacement and Dust Covers, Emergency Override, and Flex Release
Replacement Covers
Item
Cat. No.
Elf™
440A-A33085
Cadet™
440A-A21115
Trojan T15
440A-A11499
Trojan 5 Standard Models Only
440A-A11495
Trojan T5 GD2
440A-A11496
Trojan T6 Standard Models Only
440A-A11497
General
Description
1-
Trojan T6 GD2
440A-A11498
440G-MT No LED, No Override
440G-MT47120
2-Opto-electronics
440G-MT LED and Override
440G-MT47123
Cover for TLS-1 with external override key for series D and earlier
440G-A27140
Cover for TLS-3 with external override key for series D and earlier
440G-A27142
Cover for TLS-1 with override key attached for series D and earlier
440G-A27207
Cover for TLS-3 with override key attached for series D and earlier
440G-A27208
Atlas Replacement End Cap
440G-A07180
Applicable Switch
Cat. No.
Elf Cadet
440K-A17182
Trojan T15, T5, and T6 All Models
MT G2
440G-MT
440K-A17180
TLS-GD2
440K-A17183
Atlas 5
440K-A17181
Description
Cat. No.
TLS-GD2/440G-MT Solenoid Emergency Override
(See Warning below.)
440G-A36026
Dust Covers
Item
3-Interlock
Switches
Emergency Override
Item
Operator
Interface
WARNING: Do not attach the Emergency Override Key to the TLS-GD2/440G-MT switch.
Flex Release
Logic
Item
Description
Cat. No.
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
125 (4.9)
100 (3.93)
Flexible Release—1 m
(3.28 ft) Cable
440G-A27356
60 40
(2.36) (1.57)
4 x M5
Flexible Release—3 m
(9.84 ft) Cable
440G-A27357
95
(3.7)
8
(0.31)
Power
150 (5.9)
65 (2.55)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-54
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_2_GuardLock
5/3/2010
2:20 PM
Page 3-55
Safety Switches
Accessories
Tools and Door Handles
Item
Description
Cat. No.
Security Bit
440A-A09015
Screwdriver Including Security Bit
440A-A09018
General
Tools
Door Handles
Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Ø10
20
(0.39) (0.78)
50
(1.96)
Cat. No.
1-
Description
20
18 (0.7)
19 (0.74)
50
100 (3.93)
140 (5.51)
Sliding bolt actuator
84 (3.3)
40
(1.57)
5.5
(0.21)
Tapped M5
25.5
(1.0)
42
(1.65)
2.5 (0.09)
55.4
(2.18)
65 (2.56)
24
(0.94)
20.5
(0.8)
117.5 (4.62)
34 (1.33)
440G-A27163
2-Opto-electronics
Item
6.4 (0.25) Dia.
Sliding Bolt
440K-AMDS
3-Interlock
Switches
54.4
(2.14)
120 (4.72)
Sliding Bolt Mounting
Plate for TLS-GD2
13
52
(2.05) (0.51)
125
(4.92)
3
(0.12)
52
(2.05)
8 (0.32)
34 (1.36)
23 (0.91)
7.35 (0.29)
38
(1.5)
60.5
(2.38)
19
(0.75)
18
(0.71)
130
(5.12)
440K-AMDSSMPB
8
(0.32)
43 (1.69)
65.95 (2.6)
105.3 (4.15)
Power
Logic
43
6
(0.24) (1.69)
17
(0.67)
Operator
Interface
73 (2.87)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-55
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-56
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
IEC 60947-5-3, IEC 61508, EN 954
Safety Classification
Cat. 4/SIL3
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
PFHD: > 1.12 x 10-9
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable
for performance levels PLe or PLd
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for
use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according
to IEC 62061) depending on application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus (UL 508), and TÜV
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
1-
Description
2-Opto-electronics
When it comes to machine safety, Rockwell Automation knows that
protection of personnel and equipment is your main concern. At the
same time, flexibility and productivity are points that must also be
considered as you design your safety system. Optimize all of these
with the new Allen-Bradley SensaGuard family of non-contact
switches.
Featuring the latest generation of RFID technology for coding and
inductive technology for sensing, SensaGuard’s large sensing range
and tolerance to misalignment is a cost-effective solution that is
ideally suited for a wide range of industrial safety applications.
The SensaGuard product line is a Category 4/SIL 3 rated switch per
EN954-1, TÜV functional safety approved to IEC 61508.
Features
3-Interlock
Switches
Operator
Interface
Switches can be connect to a standard safety relay, for example,
the MSR126, MSR127, MSR200/300 Family, SmartGuard™ and
Safety I/O Blocks
Multiple actuator sizes for large sensing distance
IP69K environmental rating
Short-circuit and over-voltage protection
LED located on the switch for door status and troubleshooting
Unique coded version
− Automatic learn process at unit power up
− During commissioning you have the option to select if the sensor
can learn a new actuator up to eight times or lock the unit so it
can not learn another actuator
Integrated latch version
− Adjustable magnetic latch force 20…60N
− Designed for easy mounting on aluminum profile
Benefits
Logic
No dedicated controller required
Cat 4/SIL 3 rating maintained even with multiple units connected
in series
Switches can be connected in series with other devices (light
curtain, E-stops, key interlock switches)
Extended diagnostics for easy troubleshooting
Large sensing distances
Tolerance to misalignment
Multiple sensing directions
Stainless steel version suitable for use in harsh environments
Use standard proximity brackets
Safety Outputs
2 x PNP, 0.2 A, max.; Status: ON (+24V
DC)
Auxiliary Outputs
1 x PNP, 0.2 A max.; Status: OFF (0V
DC)
Operating Characteristics
Sensing Distance (Assure)
18 mm Plastic
Barrel/18 mm Target
15 mm
(0.59 in.)
18 mm Plastic
Barrel/30 mm Target
25 mm
(0.98 in.)
18 mm Stainless Steel
Barrel/Standard Target
10 mm
(0.39 in.)
Large Rectangular Flat
Pack with Standard Target
15 mm
(0.59 in.)
Misalignment Tolerance, Min
See misalignment curve
Repeat Accuracy
10% of Sensing Range
Output Current, Max.
200 mA (all outputs)
Operating Voltage
24V DC, +10%/-15%
Class 2
Current Consumption
50 mA
Frequency of Operating Cycle
1 Hz
Response Time (Off)
54 ms
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
NEMA 3, 4X, 12, 13, IP69K
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+55° (+14…+131°)
Relative Humidity
5…95%
Shock
IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6 10…55 Hz
Radio Frequency
IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
VALOX® DR 48
Actuator Material
VALOX® DR 48
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 30 years
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-56
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-57
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Product Selection
Actuator Code
Magnetic Hold
Type
18 mm plastic
barrel/18 mm
actuator
15 mm
(0.59 in.)
Yes
—
—
18 mm plastic
barrel/30 mm
actuator
25 mm
(0.98 in.)
Yes
—
—
18 mm
stainless steel
barrel/18 mm
actuator
Plastic
rectangular/
rectangular
actuator
Plastic housing
with integrated
latch
10 mm
(0.39 in.)
Yes
18 mm
(0.71 in.)
Yes
Contact/
latched
Yes
—
—
—
—
Yes
—
Yes
Yes (9 N)
—
Adjustable
20…60 N
Connector
6 inch Pigtail, 8pin Micro (M12)
3m
10 m
Standard
440N-Z21S16A
440N-Z21S16B
440N-Z21S16H
Unique
440N-Z21U16A
440N-Z21U16B
440N-Z21U16H
Standard
440N-Z21S26A
440N-Z21S26B
440N-Z21S26H
Unique
440N-Z21U26A
440N-Z21U26B
440N-Z21U26H
Standard
440N-Z21S17A
440N-Z21S17B
440N-Z21S17H
Unique
440N-Z21U17A
440N-Z21U17B
440N-Z21U17H
Standard
440N-Z21SS2A
440N-Z21SS2B
440N-Z21SS2H
Unique
440N-Z21US2A
440N-Z21US2B
440N-Z21US2H
Standard
440N-Z21SS2AN
440N-Z21SS2BN
440N-Z21SS2HN
Unique
440N-Z21US2AN
440N-Z21US2BN
440N-Z21US2HN
Standard
440N-Z21SS2AN9 440N-Z21SS2BN9 440N-Z21SS2HN9
Unique
440N-Z21US2AN9 440N-Z21US2BN9 440N-Z21US2HN9
Standard
440N-Z21SS3PA
440N-Z21SS3PB
440N-Z21SS3PH
Unique
440N-Z21US3PA
440N-Z21US3PB
440N-Z21US3PH
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
MSR211P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
Single-Function Safety Relays
MSR127RP
MSR127TP
Monitored Manual
5-26
440R-N23135
5-26
440R-N23132
24V DC from the
base unit
5-84
440R-H23177
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
Modular Safety Relays
Operator
Interface
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Connection Systems
Description
1-
Margin
Indication
2-Opto-electronics
LED Door
Indication/
Diagnostic
3-Interlock
Switches
Type
Assured
Sensing
Distance
General
Cat. No.
Cable
Cat. No.
889D-F8AB-1
Cordset
Patchcord
889D-F8ABDM-
Safety Wired T-Port
898D-438Y-D8
Safety Wired Shorting Plug
898D-418U-DM
Power
Logic
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-57
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-58
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Accessories
Description
General
18 mm plastic actuator
30 mm plastic actuator
18 mm stainless steel actuator
1Rectangular plastic actuator
2-Opto-electronics
Integrated latch actuator
To Be Used With
Cat. No.
Standard coded models only
440N-Z18PT
Unique coded models only
440N-Z18UPT
Standard coded models only
440N-Z30PT
Unique coded models only
440N-Z30UPT
Standard coded models only
440N-Z18SST
Unique coded models only
440N-Z18USST
Standard coded models only
440N-ZPREC
Unique coded models only
440N-ZUPREC
Standard coded margin/magnetic hold models only
440N-ZPRECM
Unique coded margin/magnetic hold models only
440N-ZUPRECM
Standard coded models only
440N-ZLPREC
Unique coded models only
440N-ZULPREC
Mountingbracket for tubular proximity sensors—
right angle style
871A-BRS18
Mounting bracket for tubular sensors—clamp style
871A-BP18
18 mm barrel models
3-Interlock
Switches
Snap clamp mounting bracket
871A-SCBP18
Swivel/tilt bracket allows ±10° vertical and 360°
rotation adjustment
60-2649
Mounting plate for vertically hinged doors
440N-AHDB
Integrated latch version only
Operator
Interface
Mounting plate for slide and gull wing doors
440N-ASDB
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-58
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-59
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
22.22
(0.87)
15.42
(0.61)
4.57
(0.18) Dia.
48.92
(1.926)
30.4
(1.197)
14.43
(0.568)
4.57
(0.18) Dia.
3.17
(0.125)
4.57
(0.18) Dia.
2 Places
4.75
(0.187)
15.87
36.47
19.81 (1.436) (0.62)
(0.78)
13.72
(0.54)
19.81
(0.78)
19.81
(0.78)
30 mm Plastic Actuator
22.22
(0.87)
48.92
(1.926)
18 mm Plastic Actuator
16.1
(0.634)
13.72
(0.54) 15.87
(0.62)
36.47
(1.436)
15.87
36.47 (0.62)
(1.436)
13.72
(0.54)
13.72
(0.54)
15.87
(0.62)
36.47
(1.436)
18 mm Stainless Steel Actuator
1-
16.84
(0.66)
3.17
(0.125)
General
18 mm Barrel
67.06 (2.64)
2.03 (0.08)
Sensor
2-Opto-electronics
M18X1
Large Rectangular Flat Pack
18.54 (0.73)
20.65
(0.813)
20.65
(0.813)
24.99
(0.984)
18.54
(0.73)
10.67 (0.42)
4.57
(0.18)
77.98
(3.07)
72.9
(2.87)
88.14
(3.47)
88.14
(3.47)
62.53
(2.46)
68.31
(2.689)
10.66 (0.42)
5.08
(0.2) Dia.
7.11 (0.28)
82.55
(3.25)
57.96
(2.28)
77.98
(3.07)
3-Interlock
Switches
24.99
(0.984)
4.57 (0.18)
4.57
(0.18)
6.78 (0.267)
4.57
(0.18)
4.57 (0.18)
5.08
(0.2)
Dia.
13.41
(0.528)
Operator
Interface
QD
Connector
Version
9.96
(0.392)
M12 x 1
9.7
(0.38) Dia.
Integrated Latch
11.8
(0.46)
62.5
(2.46)
7 (0.28)
Logic
30
(1.18)
53.98 (2.13)
75.8 (2.98)
88 (3.46)
Power
8
27 (0.32)
(1.06)
21.5
(0.85)
36.5 (1.44)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-59
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-60
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Description
Plastic
Stainless Steel
General
2-24V DC +
1-Aux A
3-N/A
8-Safety A+
4-Safety B+
8-Pin Micro (M12)
7-Ground
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
or cable version
2-24V DC +
1-Aux A
3-Shield
8-Safety A+
4-Safety B+
7-Ground
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
Grey
Safety A
Safety A
Red
Safety A+
Safety A+
Pink
Safety B
Safety B
Yellow
Safety B+
Safety B+
1-
White
Aux A
Aux A
Brown
24V DC +
24V DC +
Blue
Gnd
Gnd
Green
NA
Shield
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Misalignment Curves
18 mm Plastic Barrel
30 mm Plastic Barrel
35
25
14
OFF
30
OFF
20
12
11
OFF
Face to Face Distance—mm
Assured Sensing
Distance
10
9
8
ON
7
6
5
3
Assured Sensing
Distance
10
ON
5
4
Side Lobe
Side Lobe
OFF
15
Side Lobe
Side Lobe
Face to Face Distance—mm
13
Sensing Distance
2-Opto-electronics
18 mm Stainless Steel Barrel
15
25
Assured Sensing
Distance
OFF
OFF
20
15
ON
10
Side Lobe
Side Lobe
5
3-Interlock
Switches
2
1
OFF
0
-15-14-13-12-11-10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
0
-25 -20
-15
-10
-5
(-0.98)(-0.787) (-0.59) (-0.39) (-0.19)
0
5
10
15
20
25
(0.19) (0.39) (0.59) (0.787) (0.98)
Lateral Misalignment Tolerance—mm (in)
0
-30
(-1.18)
-20
(-0.787)
-10
(-0.39)
0
10
(0.39)
20
(0.787)
30
(1.18)
Lateral Misalignment Tolerance—mm (in)
Misalignment
Note: There must be a minimum spacing of 4 Note: There must be a minimum spacing of 4 Note: There must be a minimum spacing of 7
mm (0.157 in.) if actuator and sensor face
mm (0.157 in.) if actuator and sensor face
mm (0.275 in.) if actuator and sensor face
approaches laterally. This will prevent false
approaches laterally. This will prevent false
approaches laterally. This will prevent false
triggering due to the side lobe areas.
triggering due to the side lobe areas.
triggering due to the side lobe areas.
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-60
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-61
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Large Rectangular Flat Pack
50
40
40
30
30
20
20
20
20
Side
Lobes
30
10
20
30
40
40
40
50
50
50
23
20
15
10
5
0
Sensing Distance (mm)
Sensing Distance (mm)
2-Opto-electronics
30
0
1-
10
23
10
10
20
0
15
0
10
10
10
0
Misalignment (mm)
20
Assured
Sensing
Distance
5
Side
Lobes
Margin of
Indication
Assured
Sensing
Distance
30
Side
Lobes
General
50
40
Misalignment (mm)
50
Minimum Distance Between Sensors
18 mm Actuator
18 mm Actuator
30 mm Actuator
50 mm
100 mm
Sensor
2
Sensor
1
Stainless
Steel
Barrel
Sensor
2
Sensor
1
Plastic
Barrel
Sensor
2
3-Interlock
Switches
Sensor
1
70 mm
Plastic
Barrel
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
150 mm
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-61
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-62
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Diagnostic
RTN
Actuator 1
Actuator 2
Actuator 3
Actuator 4
Actuator 5
Switch 1
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 4
Switch 5
hi
te
e
Pink
Gray
+0 V
+0 V
Brown
Yel
Actuator 4 is in sensing range.
Switch
4 is functioning properly.
Series inputs are 0V.
OSSDs are de-energized to 0V.
Green LED is Flashing to indicate
Series inputs are not 24V.
Blu
Red
Pink
Gray
Actuator 3 is in sensing range.
Switch
3 has fault.
See Table Above—Red LED is flashing
Brown
Yel
+0 V
+0 V
e
W
hi
te
Blu
Red
Pink
Gray
Yel
Red
Actuator 2 is in sensing range.
Switch
2 is functioning properly
OSSDs are energize to 24 V
Green LED is ON.
Brown
Pink
Gray
Yel
Actuator 1 is in sensing range.
Switch
1 is functioning properly
OSSDs are energize to 24 V
Green LED is ON.
+24 V
+24 V
e
W
e
Red
+24 V
+24 V
Blu
hi
te
Blu
Brown
Pink
Gray
Brown
Yel
Red
White
1-
Recoverable fault
e
W
Blu
hi
te
1606
-XL120D
W
General
24VDC
Power
+24
Supply
+0 V
+0 V
Actuator 5 is in sensing range.
Switch
5 is functioning properly.
Series inputs are 0V.
OSSDs are de-energized to 0V.
Green LED is Flashing to indicate
Series inputs are not 24V.
OSSDs are OFF
Unit Indicators (per IEC 60073)
Status
Troubleshooting
Off
Not Powered
NA
Red
Not Safe, Output Off
NA
Green
Safe, Output On
NA
Green Flash
Power Up Test
Check 24V DC on Safety + Outputs
(yellow and red wire)
Red Flash
1 Hz Flash Recoverable Fault
4 Hz Flash Nonrecoverable Fault
Recoverable Fault: Check Safety Outputs Are Not
Shorted to GND, 24V DC or Each Other. Cycle Power.
Amber Flash
Safe, Output On, Sensor Is Reaching
Max. Sensing Distance
Re-adjust Distance Between Actuator and Sensor until
Output LED Is Green
RT
24V DC
Power +24
Supply
1606
Operator
Interface
OFF
Initial Conditions:
All actuators are in sensing
distance.
Logic
360 mS
e
Blu
n
ow
Pink
Grey
White
Red
Yel
Br
Sensor 3
Actuator 3
e
Blu
wn
o
Br
54 mS
Actuator 1 is out of sensing range. Actuator 1 is moved into sensing
Actuator 2 and 3 are in
range.
sensing range.
Sensor 1 OSSD outputs are
energized.
0 mS
Red
Yellow
White
Pink
Grey
Sensor 2 drops the 24 volts
(red and yellow) from Sensor 1 OSSD
outputs.
Green LED flashes.
Actuator 1 is moved out of
sensing range.
0 mS
ON
Sensor 2
Pink
Grey
White
Red
Yel
Brown
Actuator 2
Blu
e
A2
Actuator 1
3-Interlock
Switches
Unit Response Time
Sensor 1
2-Opto-electronics
Device Output LED
State
S11 S52 S12
13
23
33
41
14
24
34
42
440R-N23126
S21 S22 S34
A1
Sensor 3 drops the 24 volts
(red and yellow) from Sensor 2 OSSD
outputs.
Green LED flashes.
72 mS
Sensor 2 OSSD inputs (red and
yellow) transition to 24V DC from
Sensor 1 OSSD outputs.
Sensor 2 OSSD outputs are energized
90 mS
Sensor 3 OSSD inputs (red and yellow)
transition to 24V DC from Sensor 2
OSSD outputs.
Sensor 3 OSSD outputs are energized.
378 mS
396 mS
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-62
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-63
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
Application Wiring Examples
Monitored Reset
Automatic Reset
+24V DC
+24V DC
SensaGuard
Unit 1
SensaGuard
Unit 1
S52
S12
13
Brown
Red
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
Brown
Red
Yellow
23
33
41
A1
Reset
S22
S21
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
41
A2
14
24
34
42
MSR127TP
MSR127RP
S34
A2
14
24
K1
K2
34
S22
S21
42
S34
K1
1-
S11
Pink
Gray
Blue
A1
General
MSR127RP with One Sensor
K2
GND
GND
MSR127RP with Three Sensors
Automatic Reset
+24V DC
+24V DC
SensaGuard
Unit 1
SensaGuard
Unit 2
S34
S12
13
23
33
41
S34
A2
14
24
34
42
K1
K2
MSR127TP
A2
14
24
34
K1
K2
42
S21
S22
GND
GND
MSR127RP with Two Sensors and One Light Curtain
Monitored Reset
Automatic Reset
+24V DC
+24V DC
SensaGuard
Unit 2
33
41
S34
A2
14
24
34
42
Brown
23
Guard
Shield
Pink
Gray
Blue
13
Brown
Red
S12
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
S34
A2
14
K1
24
34
S21
42
S22
K1
K2
K2
GND
GND
Note: Light curtain must be last (farthest from MSR127).
Power
Note: Light curtain must be last (farthest from MSR127).
Logic
S22
S52
SensaGuard
Unit 3
MSR127TP
MSR127RP
S21
S11
Brown
Red
A1
Reset
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
41
SensaGuard
Unit 2
Brown
Red
33
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
23
Brown
13
S12
SensaGuard
Unit 1
GuardShield
Pink
Gray
Blue
S52
Brown
Red
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
S11
Brown
Red
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
Brown
Red
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
A1
SensaGuard
Unit 3
Operator
Interface
SensaGuard
Unit 1
3-Interlock
Switches
S22
S52
Brown
Red
S21
S11
SensaGuard
Unit 3
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
A1
Reset
MSR127RP
Brown
Red
41
33
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
23
SensaGuard
Unit 2
Brown
Red
13
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
S12
SensaGuard
Unit 1
Brown
S52
Red
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
S11
Brown
Red
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
Brown
Red
Yellow
Pink
Gray
Blue
A1
SensaGuard
Unit 3
2-Opto-electronics
Monitored Reset
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-63
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-64
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
MSR200 Series with Three Sensors and One Light Curtain
Manual Reset
General
+24V DC
S20
S32
SensaGuard
Pink
13
23
31
Y40 Y41 Y42
A1
1-
Pink
Gray
SensaGuard
S20
S32
S32
S42
S50
S62
S32
MSR230P
MSR211P
S62
S12
440R-H23180
440R-H23177
MSR211P
S50
Gray
S12 S20 S32 S51 S11 S21 S31 S41
440R-H23179
S42
Blue
S12
Gray
Red
Pink
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Blue
GuardShield
S42 S50 S62 S34
Y1
Y2
Y3
14
24
32
Y32 Y33 Y30
A2
Pink Gray
SensaGuard
K2
K1
K4
Blue
Red
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
K2
K1
Reset
K3
GND
Note: Light curtain can be attached to any input.
2-Opto-electronics
Automatic Reset
+24V DC
S20
S32
SensaGuard
Pink
23
31
Y40 Y41 Y42
A1
Gray
SensaGuard
S42 S50 S62 S34
Pink
S12
S20
S32
S32
S42
S50
S62
S32
440R-H23180
MSR230P
MSR211P
S62
Y1
Y2
Y3
14
24
32
Y32 Y33 Y30
A2
Gray
SensaGuard
K2
K1
K4
Blue
Red
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
Yellow
3-Interlock
Switches
Pink
13
440R-H23177
MSR211P
S50
Gray
S12 S20 S32 S51 S11 S21 S31 S41
440R-H23179
S42
Blue
S12
Gray
Red
Pink
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Blue
GuardShield
K2
K1
K3
GND
Note: Light curtain can be attached to any input
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-64
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-65
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
SensaGuard™
MSR200 Series with Four Sensors
+24V DC
S32
SensaGuard
Pink
440R-H23179
13
23
31
Y40 Y41 Y42
A1
S62
Pink
Gray
SensaGuard
S20
S32
S32
S42
S50
S62
S32
MSR230P
MSR211P
S50
S12
440R-H23180
440R-H23177
MSR211P
S42
Gray
S12 S20 S32 S51 S11 S21 S31 S41
S42 S50 S62 S34
Y1
Y2
Y3
14
24
32
Y32 Y33 Y30
A2
Pink Gray
SensaGuard
K2
K1
1-
S20
Blue
S12
Gray
Red
Pink
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
SensaGuard
General
Manual Reset
K4
Blue
Red
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
K2
K1
Reset
K3
Automatic Reset
+24V DC
S32
SensaGuard
Pink
440R-H23179
S50
Pink
13
23
31
Y40 Y41 Y42
A1
Gray
SensaGuard
S42 S50 S62 S34
Pink
S20
S32
S32
S42
S50
S62
S32
MSR230P
MSR211P
S62
S12
440R-H23180
440R-H23177
MSR211P
S42
Gray
S12 S20 S32 S51 S11 S21 S31 S41
Y1
Y2
Y3
14
24
32
Y32 Y33 Y30
A2
Gray
SensaGuard
K2
K1
K4
Blue
Red
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
3-Interlock
Switches
S20
Blue
S12
Gray
Red
Pink
Yellow
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Red
Blue
SensaGuard
K2
K1
2-Opto-electronics
GND
K3
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
GND
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-65
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-66
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Magnetically Coded
Specifications
MC1
MC2
General
Safety Ratings
1-
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC609475-1, IEC/EN60947-5-3, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1; Dual
channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or
4 systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
PFHD: > 3 x 10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable
for performance levels PLe or PLd
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for
use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according
to IEC 62061) depending on application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, and TÜV
Description
2-Opto-electronics
With the increasing speed and complexity of applications a simple
magnetic switch may be insufficient to meet the increased risks,
therefore the design incorporates several magnetically sensitive
elements which must be triggered in a particular sequence to
operate correctly.
The sensor with its molded-in brackets and diminutive size, is
extremely versatile and simple to install. For high-risk applications
the control unit is used with a single sensor to give a high-integrity
system. For other applications, multiple sensors (including
mechanical switches) can be connected.
Features
3-Interlock
Switches
Non-contact actuation
Magnetic coded sensing
High tolerance to misalignment
Designed for use with specified controllers
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
Safety Outputs
2 N.C. REEDS
2 N.C. Solid-State
Relays
Auxiliary Outputs
—
1 x PNP, 0.2 A
max.; Status: OFF
(0V DC)
Operating Distance, Make
[mm (in.)]
8 (0.3)
10 (0.39)
Operating Distance, Break
[mm (in.)]
15 (0.59)
25 (0.98)
Misalignment Tolerance, Min
See Misalignment Wire
Repeat Accuracy
10% of Sensing Range
Output Current, Max.
200 mA
Operating Characteristics
200 mA
Switching Current @ Voltage, Max. 24V DC @ 200 mA
24V DC @ 200 mA
+10%/-15%
Operating Voltage/Power Supply
—
24V DC, +10%/15%/50 mA
max./Class 2 SELV
Frequency of Operating Cycle
1 Hz
1 Hz
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
IP 69K
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+55° (+14…+131°)
Environmental
Operator
Interface
Relative Humidity
5…95%
Shock
IEC 68-2, 27, 30 g, 11 ms
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10…55 Hz
Radio Frequency
IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Molded ABS
Ultrador
Actuator Material
Molded ABS
Ultrador
Color
Red
Logic
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-66
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-67
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Magnetically Coded
Operating
Voltage/Input
Current
Type
MC1
Safety Outputs
—
2 N.C. REEDS
24V DC, +10%/15%/50 mA max.
MC2
Auxiliary Outputs
Status Indicator
—
2 N.C. Solid-State
Relays
Connection
Cat. No.
—
440N-Z2NRS1C
No
1 x PNP, 0.2 A max.;
Status: OFF (0V DC)
—
440N-Z2NRS1A
10 m Cable
440N-Z2NRS1B
8-Pin Micro (M12)
440N-Z21W1PH
Yes
—
440N-Z21W1PA
—
440N-Z21W1PB
General
Product Selection
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
1-
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
3-Interlock
Switches
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Description
8-Pin Micro (M12)
2 N.C.
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
889D-F4AC-1
889D-F8AB-1
889D-F4ACDM-
889D-F8ABDM-
Distribution Box
898D-4‡LT-DM4
—
Shorting Plug
898D-41LU-DM
—
898D-43LY-D4
—
Cordset
Patchcord
T-Port
Operator
Interface
Connection Systems
Connection to Distribution Box
4-Pin Micro (M12)
2-Opto-electronics
Modular Safety Relays
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports.
Note: For additional information, see the page 7-1.
Accessories
Cat. No.
440N-A17233
MC2 Spare Actuator
440N-A32114
Power
Logic
Description
MC1 Spare Actuator
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-67
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-68
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Magnetically Coded
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
25 (0.98)
12
(0.47)
12 (0.47)
29
(1.14)
48
(1.89)
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
22 (0.87)
48 (1.89)
25 (0.98)
24 (0.94)
2 x M4
MC2
13 (0.51)
6 (0.24)
5.5 (0.22)
24 (0.94)
13 (0.51)
Ø 4.2
22 (0.87)
24 (0.94)
4.8 (0.19)
48 (1.89)
General
MC1
22
(0.87)
48
(1.89)
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
22
(0.87)
2 x M4
5.5
(0.22)
4.8 (0.19)
20
(0.79)
5.5
(0.22)
1-
53 (12.1)
20 (0.79)
29
(1.14)
16.5
(0.65)
16.5
(0.65)
2-Opto-electronics
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Description
MC1
MC2
2 N.C.
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2-Safety B
4-Pin Micro (M12)
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
—
4-Safety B
3-Interlock
Switches
8-Pin Micro (M12)
—
2-Power+
1-Aux A
3-N/A
8-Safety A+
4-Safety B+
7-Ground
6-Safety B
5-Safety A
Brown
Cordset
889D-F4AC-1
or Cable Version
Blue
White
Black
Safety A
—
Safety B
—
Grey
Operator
Interface
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
or Cable Version
Safety A
Red
Safety A
Pink
Safety B
Yellow
White
—
Safety B
Aux
Brown
24V DC +
Blue
Gnd
Green
NA
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-68
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-69
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Magneticallly Coded
Sensing & Misalignment Curve
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
Sensor
Actuator
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
6
General
16
Make-Break
Make-Break
MC1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
MC2
1-
Break
Face A
2-Opto-electronics
Make
MC2 Application Wiring Example
N/A
Green (3)
3-Interlock
Switches
Aux
Safety B-
White (1)
Pink (6)
Safety A-
Yellow (4) Safety B+
Grey (5)
0v
Safety A+
Red (8)
Blue (7)
Brown (2)
+24v
Magnetically Coded Small Flat Pack
L1
A1
S11
S52
S12
13
23
33
L2
L3
41
Operator
Interface
Red
Grey
+24V
K1
MSR127RP
K2
S22
S34
A2
14
24
34
42
K1
K2
Logic
Pink
Yellow
S21
M
Power
0V
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-69
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-70
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 1, 2, 20 & 21
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
1-
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers
non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They
are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened,
the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch
opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation
of control power to a machine primary control element.
The FRS1, FRS2, FRS20, FRS21 are rectangular housings. Sealed
to IP67 (NEMA 6P), these Ferrogards are ideal for wet environments.
Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected
safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In
addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts
to indicate the guard condition.
All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on
the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse
rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Functional Safety Data
Note: For up-to-date
information, visit
http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
PFHD: > 3 x 10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable for
performance levels PLe or PLd (according to
ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or
SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061)
depending on application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives and
cULus
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
Safety Outputs
FRS1: 1 N.C., FRS2: 1 N.C., FRS20: 2 N.C.,
FRS21: 2 N.C.
Auxiliary Outputs
FRS1: None, FRS2: 1 N.O., FRS20: None,
FRS21: 1 N.O.
Operating Characteristics
Operating Distance, Make
[mm (in.)]
Safety: 12 (0.47); Auxiliary: 15 (0.59)
Operating Distance, Break
[mm (in.)]
Safety: 23 (0.91); Auxiliary: 26 (1.02)
Fuses, External
FRS1, 2 & 21: 1.6 A (Bussmann BK/60 A-1.6
A) max.
FRS20: 0.4 A (Bussmann BK/60 A-400 mA)
max.
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
3-Interlock
Switches
Operating Temperature [C (F)] -10…+55° (+14…+131°)
Features
Relative Humidity
Non-contact actuation
High tolerance to misalignment
High switching current (up to 2 A AC, 1 A DC)
Plastic rectangular housing (IP67)
Cable or quick-disconnect (QD) connections
Shock
5…95%
50 g
Vibration
7 g; 50…200 Hz
Radio Frequency
IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6
Physical Characteristics
Operator
Interface
Actuator/Housing Material
Molded ABS plastic
Weight [g (lbs)]
FRS 1—Sensor: 35 (0.08)/Actuator: 85 (0.19)
FRS 2—Sensor: 40 (0.09)/Actuator: 85 (0.19)
FRS 20—Sensor: 43 (0.09)/Actuator: 85
(0.19)
FRS 21—Sensor: 43 (0.09)/Actuator: 85
(0.19)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-70
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-71
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 1, 2, 20 & 21
Product Selection
Type
4 m Cable
—
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
250V AC, 2 A max
6 m Cable
440N-G02004
FRS 1
—
440N-G02041
10 m Cable
440N-G02015
2 m Cable
440N-G02002
4 m Cable
440N-G02014
6 m Cable
440N-G02038
8 m Cable
10 m Cable
FRS 2
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
—
24V DC, 1 A
440N-G02043
440N-G02040
4-Pin Micro QD
440N-G02093
FRS 20
6 m Cable
1 N.O.
440N-G02097
440N-G02055
440N-G02061
FRS 21
440N-G02060
10 m Cable
440N-G02059
6-Pin AC Micro QD§
440N-G02098
2 m Cable
4-Pin Micro QD
4 m Cable
4-Pin Micro QD
FRS 2
FRS 20
4 m Cable
6 m Cable
440N-G02092
440N-G02094
440N-G02085
440N-G02090
440N-G02058
2 m Cable
2 N.C.
440N-G02019
20 m Cable
4 m Cable
1 N.O.
440N-G02033
15 m Cable
2 m Cable
2 N.C.
440N-G02022
8 m Cable
4-Pin Micro QD
2 N.C.
Cat. No.
440N-G02001
2 m Cable
General
Connection
1-
Auxiliary Contacts
2-Opto-electronics
Safety Contacts
FRS 21
6-Pin Micro QD
440N-G02077
440N-G02083
440N-G02099
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped complete with actuator.
§ For connector ratings see 3-9.
3-Interlock
Switches
Safety Contact
Switching Capability
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-71
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-72
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 1, 2, 20 & 21
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
General
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
Single-Function Safety Relays for 2 N.C. Contact Switch
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-14
440R-F23027
1 N.O.
Removable
Auto. or Monitored
Manual
24V DC SELV
5-18
440R-F23200
MSR30T
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Single-Function Safety Relays for 1 N.C. & 1 N.O. Contact Switch
MSR9T
2 N.O.
MSR33RT
1 N.C.
2 N.O. Solid State
1-
Modular Safety Relays
2-Opto-electronics
MSR211P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-84
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Connection Systems
Accessories
Connection to
Distribution Box
4-Pin Micro (M12)
1 N.C. & 1 N. O.
Description
6-Pin Micro (M12)
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
3-Interlock
Switches
889D-F4AC-1
889R-F6ECA-1
Patchcord
889D-F4ACDM-
889R-F6ECRM-
Distribution Box
Cordset
Description
Replacement Actuator
898D-P4‡KT-DM4
898R-F68MT-A5
Shorting Plug
898D-41KU-DM
898R-P61MU-RM
T-Port
898D-43KY-D4
—
Cat. No.
440N-A02005
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports.
Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
=
=
=
15
(0.59)
=
13
(0.51)
=
5
(0.2)
=
30
(1.18)
5
(0.2)
=
7 (0.28)
4 (0.16)
19.5
(0.77)
2
(0.08)
76 (2.99)
2 (0.08)
60 (2.36)
=
=
60 (2.36)
5
(0.2)
8 (0.31)
19.5
(0.77)
8 (0.31)
8 (0.31)
=
5
(0.2)
=
5 (0.2)
76 (2.99)
5
(0.2)
=
Logic
60 (2.36)
2
(0.08)
4 (0.16)
15
(0.59)
30 (1.18)
=
=
4 (0.16)
76 (2.99)
mm (in)
≤ 19
(0.75)
Operator
Interface
Approximate Dimensions
=
19.5
(0.77)
=
=
15
(0.59)
=
30
(1.18)
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-72
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-73
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 1, 2, 20 & 21
FRS1
FRS2
FRS20
FRS21
1 N.C.
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2-Safety B
2-Aux A
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
4-Aux A
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
—
4-Safety B
6-Safety B
2-Safety B
3-Aux A
—
—
—
4-Aux A
1-Safety A
5-Safety A
Brown
Cordset
889D-F4AC-1 or
Cable Versions
Blue
Black
White
—
Safety A
Safety A
—
—
Aux A
Safety B
—
Red/White
Safety A
Red/Black
Red
Cordset
889R-F6ECA-1
Red/Blue
—
—
—
Green
Cable Versions
Safety B
Aux A
Red/Yellow
Safety A
2-Opto-electronics
6-Pin Micro (M12)
1-
—
Brown
Blue
Brown
Black
Blue
White
Blue
White
Safety B
—
Aux A
—
Yellow
Black
Red
Green
White
Blue
—
—
Yellow
Green
3-Interlock
Switches
4-Pin Micro (M12)
General
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-73
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-74
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 3, 4 & 5
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
1-
Description
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated switches offers noncontact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They are
designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened, the
action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switches
opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation
of control power to a machine primary control element.
2-Opto-electronics
The FRS 3, 4 and 5 have terminal connections. The user must drill a
hole in the housing at a convenient location to allow the wiring to
enter the housing. The cover is secured with anti-tamper security
screws.
Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected
safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In
addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts
to indicate the guard condition.
3-Interlock
Switches
All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on
the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse
rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Features
Non-contact actuation
High tolerance to misalignment
High switching current (up to 2 A)
Various contact arrangements
Terminal connections
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date
information, visit
http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
PFHD: > 3 x 10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable for
performance levels PLe or PLd (according to
ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or
SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061)
depending on application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives and
cULus
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
Safety Outputs
FRS3: 1 N.C., FRS4: 1 N.C., FRS5: 1 N.C.
Auxiliary Outputs
FRS3: 1 N.C., FRS4: 1 N.O., FRS5: None
Operating Characteristics
Operating Distance, Make
[mm (in.)]
Safety/Auxiliary: FRS 3—12 (0.47); FRS 4—
12 (0.47); FRS 5—12 (0.47)
Operating Distance, Break
[mm (in.)]
Safety/Auxiliary: FRS 3—24 (0.94); FRS 4—
10 (0.39); FRS 5—12 (0.47)
Auxiliary Contact Switching
Capability, Min
300V DC, 250V AC 0.5 A including inrush
Safety Contact External
Fusing
≤1.6 A quick blow
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP65 (NEMA 13)
Operating Temperature [C (F)] -10…+65° (+14…+149°)
Relative Humidity
5…95%
Shock
IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10…200 Hz
Radio Frequency
IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Molded ABS plastic
Actuator Material
Molded ABS plastic
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
Operator
Interface
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-74
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-75
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 3, 4 & 5
Safety Contact
Switching Capability
Connection Type
250V AC 2 A max
Housing Material
Safety Contacts
Red Molded ABS
Plastic
Terminals
Auxiliary Contacts
Type
Cat. No.
1 N.C.
FRS 3
440N-G02003
1 N.O.
FRS 4
440N-G02008
—
FRS 5
440N-G02009
1 N.C.
General
Product Selection
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
Single-Function Safety Relays
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
3-Interlock
Switches
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Accessories
Description
Replacement Actuator
2-Opto-electronics
MSR30T
1-
MSR127RP
Cat. No.
440N-A02005
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
2 (0.08)
7 (0.28)
25 (0.98)
4 (0.16)
=
19.5
(0.77)
Logic
6
(0.24)
8 (0.31)
38 (1.5)
Operator
Interface
=
76 (2.99)
5
(0.2)
=
38.5 (1.52)
5
(0.2)
36 (1.41)
60 (2.36)
=
69 (2.72)
=
57 (2.24)
2 x M4
15
(0.59)
30 (1.18)
=
=
6 (0.24)
50 (1.97)
=
Typical Wiring Diagrams
FRS 3
Safety A
2
1
Safety A
2
3
1
Safety A
2
3
Aux A
4
FRS 5
Power
1
FRS 4
Aux A
4
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-75
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-76
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI
B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
PFHD: > 3 x 10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable
for performance levels PLe or PLd
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for
use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according
to IEC 62061) depending on application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and cULus
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers
non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They
are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened,
the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch
opens the N.C. safety contact which is intended for the isolation of
control power to a machine primary control element.
The FRS 6, 9, 10, 13, and 14 sensors and actuators incorporate slim
housings to accommodate narrow mounting areas. They are
environmentally sealed to IP67 (NEMA 6P), which makes them ideal
for wet environments. These Ferrogard switches have two active
sensing faces allowing more flexible mounting options.
Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected
safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger.
3-Interlock
Switches
All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on
the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse
rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Features
Operator
Interface
Non-contact actuation
High tolerance to misalignment
High switching current (up to 3 A)
Two sensing faces
IP67 (NEMA 6P) Rating
Slim housings
Stainless steel models available
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
Safety Outputs
1 N.C.
1 N.C.
Auxiliary Outputs
—
1 N.C.
Operating Characteristics
Operating Distance, Make
[mm (in.)]
12 (0.47)
Operating Distance, Break
[mm (in.)]
23 (0.91)
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+65° (+14…+149°)
Relative Humidity
5…95%
Shock
IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10…55 Hz
Radio Frequency
IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6
Physical Characteristics
Actuator/Housing Material
Molded ABS plastic
Weight [g (lb)]
Sensor/Actuator
FRS 6—28 (0.06)/70 (0.15)
FRS 9—28 (0.06)/70 (0.15)
FRS 10—28 (0.06)/70 (0.15)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-76
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-77
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
Auxiliary Contacts
Housing Material
Type
250V AC, 2 A
440N-G02028
440N-G02032
10 m Cable
440N-G02013
4-Pin Micro QD
440N-G02095
110V AC, 3 A
Stainless Steel
24V DC, 1 A
440N-G02075
440N-G02082
440N-G02089
4-Pin Micro QD
440N-G02096
2 m Cable
440N-G02045
4 m Cable
440N-G02088
2 m Cable
440N-G02154
4 m Cable
440N-G02155
4-Pin Micro QD
440N-G02160
2 m Cable
440N-G02156
4 m Cable
440N-G02157
4-Pin Micro QD
440N-G02161
FRS 13
1 N.C.
440N-G02044
4 m Cable
6 m Cable
FRS 10
250V AC, 2 A
2 m Cable
10 m Cable
FRS 9
1 N.C.
440N-G02023
4 m Cable
Red Molded ABS
Plastic
24V DC, 1 A
Cat. No.
2 m Cable
6 m Cable
FRS 6
—
Connection
FRS 14
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
1-
Safety Contacts
2-Opto-electronics
Safety Contact
Switching Capability
General
Product Selection
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR30T
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Connection Systems
Accessories
4-Pin Micro
(M12)
889D-F4AC-1
Cordset
Patchcord
889D-F4ACDM-
Description
Cat. No.
FRS 6, 9, 10 Plastic Replacement
Actuator
440N-A02025
FRS 13, 14 Stainless Steel
Replacement Actuator
440N-A02165
Logic
Description
Operator
Interface
MSR127RP
3-Interlock
Switches
Single-Function Safety Relays
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Power
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-77
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-78
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Switch, QD Version
19.5
(0.77)
19.5
(0.77)
mm (in)
=
19 (0.75)
16
(0.63)
12
(0.47)
=
46 (1.81)
46 (1.81)
6 (0.24)
7 (0.28)
11 (0.43)
54 (2.13)
84 (3.31)
=
73 (2.87)
82 (3.23)
73 (2.87)
=
= 4 (0.16)
4.5 (0.18)
=
46 (1.81)
54 (2.13)
16
(0.62)
12
(0.47)
4.5 (0.18)
2-Opto-electronics
6 (0.23)
7 (0.28)
46 (1.81)
1-
84 (3.31)
=
13 (0.51)
7 (0.28)
4.5 (0.18)
Actuator
Switch, Cable Version
4.5 (0.18)
General
FRS 6, 9, 10
= 4 (0.16)
11 (0.43)
19 (0.75)
FRS 13, 14
19
(0.75)
3-Interlock
Switches
6.5
(0.26)
9.5
(0.38)
9.5 (0.38)
9.5 (0.38)
90
(3.54)
73
(2.9)
54
(2.13)
Operator
Interface
=
41
(1.6)
46
(1.8)
7
(0.28)
46
(1.8)
19.5
(0.77)
=
11 (0.43)
6.5
(0.26)
16 (0.62)
19 (0.75)
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-78
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-79
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ 6, 9,10, 13 & 14
FRS 6, 9, 10
FRS 13, 14
1 N.C.
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2-Aux A
2-Aux A
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
4-Aux A
Brown
Blue
Cordset
889D-F4AC-1
White
Black
Safety A
4-Aux A
Safety A
Safety A
—
Aux A
Brown
Brown
Blue
Cable Version
Aux A
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
1-
4-Pin Micro (M12)
General
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Blue
Black
—
Grey
2-Opto-electronics
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
External Fuse Safety Contacts
22 +
Amp
- 21
12 +
Amp
- 11
Recommended:
*Bussman BK/GDA-1.6 A
** Bussman BK/GDA-400 mA
***Bussman BK/GDA-2.5 A
FRS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 13, 21 AC
AC ≤ 1.6 A* (F) IEC 60127-2
FRS 9, 14, 2 DC, 20 DC, 21 DC
DC ≤ 0.4 A** (F) IEC 60127-2
FRS 10
AC ≤ 2.5 A*** (F) IEC 60127-2
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
3-Interlock
Switches
WARNING: All safety contacts fitted with
internal non-resettable fuse and must be
fused externally as detailed.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-79
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-80
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ GD2
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI
B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
PFHD: > 3 x 10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable
for performance levels PLe or PLd
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for
use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according
to IEC 62061) depending on application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and cULus
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers
non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They
are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened,
the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch
opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation
of control power to a machine primary control element.
The GD2 version has a stainless steel housing for added protection
against inadvertent impacts to the housing. The contacts are
completely sealed to meet IP68 (NEMA 6P) requirements, making
them ideal for wet environments. The GD2 also has a wider
temperature range than the plastic Ferrogard switches, making them
useful in a wider range of applications.
3-Interlock
Switches
Unlike some magnetic switches, the Ferrogards have protected
safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger. In
addition, some versions have independent auxiliary signal contacts
to indicate the machine and guard condition.
All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on
the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse
rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Features
Operator
Interface
Non-contact actuation
High tolerance to misalignment
High switching current (up to 2 A AC, 1 A DC)
Wide temperature range (-25…+125°C (-13…+257°F))
Stainless steel housing
Various contact arrangements
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
Safety Outputs
1 N.C.
2 N.C.
2 N.C.
Auxiliary Outputs
1 N.O.
—
1 N.O.
Operating Characteristics
Operating Distance, Make
[mm (in.)]
Safety: 12 (0.47); Auxiliary: 15 (0.59)
Operating Distance, Break
[mm (in.)]
Safety: 23 (0.91); Auxiliary: 26 (1.02)
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP68 (NEMA 6P)
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-25…+125° (-13…+257°)
Relative Humidity
5…95%
Shock
IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10…200 Hz
Radio Frequency
IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Stainless Steel; BS3146 ANC4B (316L)
Actuator Material
Stainless Steel; BS3146 ANC4B (316L)
Weight [g (lbs)]
Sensor: 156 (0.34); Actuator: 168 (0.37)
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-80
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-81
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ GD2
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Connection
Type
Cat. No.
2 N.C.
—
3 m Cable
FRS 20 GD2
440N-G02113
1 N.C.
250V AC, 2 A max.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
2 N.C.
—
24V DC, 1 A max.
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
3 m Cable
FRS 2 GD2
440N-G02112
3 m Cable
FRS 21 GD2
440N-G02117
3 m Cable
FRS 2 GD2
440N-G02118
10 m Cable
FRS 2 GD2
440N-G02147
3 m Cable
FRS 20 GD2
440N-G02119
3 m Cable
FRS 21 GD2
440N-G02123
6 m Cable
FRS 21 GD2
440N-G02143
10 m Cable
FRS 21 GD2
440N-G02137
8-Pin Micro (M12)
FRS 21 GD2
440N-G02149
1-
Safety Contact
Switching Capability
General
Product Selection
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped with complete actuator.
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
MSR30T
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
3-Interlock
Switches
Description
Single-Function Safety Relays
2-Opto-electronics
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Connection Systems
Description
Actuator
Operator
Interface
Description
Accessories
8-Pin Micro
(M12)
Cat. No.
440N-A02128
889D-F8AB-1
Cordset
Patchcord
889D-F8ABDM-
Power
Logic
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-81
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-82
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ GD2
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
8 (0.31)
=
11.5
(0.45)
16.75
(0.66)
5 (0.2)
78.5 (3.09)
78.5 (3.09)
39.25 (1.55)
5 (0.2)
=
2-Opto-electronics
=
=
62.5 (2.46)
11.5
(0.45)
62.5 (2.46)
1-
19.5
(0.77)
16.75
(0.66)
=
7 (0.28)
16
(0.63)
39.25 (1.55)
4.4
(0.17)
16.75
(0.66)
33.5
(1.32)
7 (0.28)
=
6 (0.24)
Actuator
8 (0.31)
mm (in)
8 (0.31)
General
Switch
4.4 (0.17)
16
(0.63)
19.5
(0.77)
=
=
7 (0.28)
3-Interlock
Switches
33.5
(1.32)
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-82
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-83
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ GD2
Typical Wiring Diagrams
FRS2
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
Black
Blue
Brown
White
Red
Safety A
Red
Safety B
Yellow
Yellow
Green
Green
Shield Gnd
—
3-Ground
8-Aux A
8-Pin Micro (M12)
White
—
Green/Yellow
Green/Yellow
—
—
2-Safety A
1-Safety A
4-Aux A
7-NA
6-Safety B
5-Safety B
Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
—
Blue
Aux A
Blue
Black
1-
Cable Versions
FRS20
General
FRS21
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Brown
White
Safety A
—
—
Grey
Pink
Safety B
—
—
Yellow
Red
Safety B
—
—
Green
Blue
NA
—
—
2-Opto-electronics
Description
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
External Fuse Safety Contacts
22 +
Amp
- 21
12 +
Amp
- 11
FRS 2 GD2
FRS20 GD2
FRS21 GD2
AC ≤ 1.6 A* (F) IEC 60127-2
FRS 2 GD2
FRS 20 GD2
FRS21 GD2
DC ≤ 0.4 A** (F) IEC 60127-2
3-Interlock
Switches
WARNING: All safety contacts fitted with internal non-resettable fuse and must be fused externally as detailed.
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
Recommended:
*Bussman BK/GDA-1.6 A
** Bussman BK/GDA-400 mA
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-83
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-84
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ GS1 & GS2
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
1-
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, ANSI
B11.19, AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual channel
interlocks suitable for Cat. 3 or 4
systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
PFHD: > 3 x 10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable
for performance levels PLe or PLd
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for
use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems (according
to IEC 62061) depending on application
characteristics
Certifications
GS1 & GS2 - CE Marked for all
applicable directives and cULus
GS2 Ex - EExd IIC T6 Baseefa
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Ferrogard range of magnetically actuated safety switches offers
non-contact reliability together with tolerance to misalignment. They
are designed to be installed so that when a guard door is opened,
the action of the magnetic actuator being removed from the switch
opens the N.C. safety contacts which are intended for the isolation
of control power to a machine primary control element.
The GS1 and GS2 are designed for heavy duty applications. The
GS1 is housed in a stainless steel or brass housing. The GS2 offers
the same characteristic as the GS1, but in an Ex Range housing for
hazardous locations.
Unlike some magnetic switches the Ferrogards have protected
safety contacts to help ensure that they do not fail to danger.
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
Safety Outputs
1 N.C.
Auxiliary Outputs
—
Operating Characteristics
Operating Distance, Make
[mm (in.)]
GS1: 12 (0.47); GS2: 15 (0.59)
Operating Distance, Break
[mm (in.)]
GS1: 23 (0.91); GS2: 26 (1.02)
Environmental
3-Interlock
Switches
All Ferrogards have internal non-resettable overload protection on
the safety contact. They should be protected by an external fuse
rated as shown in the Specifications table.
Enclosure Type Rating
IP68 (NEMA 6P)
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
GS1: -25…+125° (-13…+257°)
GS2: -40…+60° (-40…146°)
See Other Safety Products section on page 9-1 for more
information on the Ex Range version of the Ferrogard GS2.
Relative Humidity
5…95%
Shock
IEC 68-2-27, 30 g, 11 ms
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6, 10…55 Hz
Features
Radio Frequency
IEC 61000-4-3, IEC 61000-4-6
Non-contact actuation
High tolerance to misalignment
High switching current (2 A AC)
Metal housings (IP68)
Ex Range version available
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Stainless Steel or Brass
Weight [g (lbs)]
GS1 Brass: 381 (0.84)
GS1 Steel: 388 (0.86)
Actuator: 116 (0.26)
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
Operator
Interface
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-84
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-85
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Ferrogard™ GS1 & GS2
Product Selection
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Connection
Housing Material
2 m Cable
250V AC, 2 A
1 N.C.
3 m Cable
440N-G02048
GS 1
Stainless Steel
None
Cat. No.
Type
Brass
440N-G02049
Brass
GS2-Ex (brass)
440N-H02046
Stainless Steel
GS2-Ex (stainless
steel)
440N-H02047
General
Safety Contact
Switching Capability
Note: Contacts are described with the guard door closed, that is, actuator in place. Switch is shipped with complete actuator.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
1-
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
2 N.O.
None
MSR126T
MSR30T
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
Accessories
3-Interlock
Switches
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Typical Wiring Diagrams
Cable
Description
Used with
Cat. No.
Actuator, Alnico
Brass Switch
440N-A02056
Actuator, Epoxy-painted
Stainless Steel
440N-A02057
2-Opto-electronics
Description
Single-Function Safety Relays
Brown
Safety A
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to
be used for installation purposes.
Ferrogard GS2
WARNING: All safety contacts fitted with internal
non-resettable fuse and must be fused externally
as detailed.
25
(0.98)
AC ≤ 1.6 A* (F) IEC 60127-2
Recommended:
*Bussman BK/GDA-1.6 A
20
(0,79)
Power
16
(0.63)
127 (5.0)
60 (2.36)
67 (2.64)
13
(0.51)
30 (1.18)
6.5 (0.26)
19
(0.75)
GS1
GS2
17 (0.67)
7 (0.28)
22
(0.87)
6.5 (0.26)
46 (1.81)
54 (2.13)
114.5 (4.51)
11 (0.43)
33.5 (1.32)
54 (2.13)
12 (0.47)
Logic
Ferrogard Actuator
19 (0.75)
Ferrogard GS1
External Fuse Safety Contacts
Operator
Interface
Blue
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-85
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-86
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Sipha™ Sensors
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Description
1-
With the increasing speed and complexity of applications a simple
magnetic switch may be insufficient to meet the increased risks,
therefore Sipha’s design incorporates several magnetically sensitive
elements which must be triggered in a particular sequence to
operate correctly. The Sipha sensor, designed to operate with its
own actuator, helps prevent defeatability by a simple magnet.
2-Opto-electronics
The Sipha with its molded-in brackets and diminutive size, is
extremely versatile and simple to install. The Sipha sensor must be
connected to the Sipha control unit giving a monitored circuit. For
high-risk applications the control unit is used with a single sensor to
give a high-integrity system. For other applications, multiple sensors
(including mechanical switches) can be connected to one Sipha
control unit. Sipha has facilities for connecting a manual reset
button and for monitoring external devices such as contactors.
Four types of sensors and actuators are available incorporating
different operating distances and physical sizes.
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN60204-1,
NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC60947-51, IEC/EN60947-5-3, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Rating dependent on control unit and
application.
Functional Safety Data
Note: For up-to-date
information, visit
http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
PFHD: > 3 x 10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel interlock may be suitable for
performance levels PLe or PLd (according
to ISO 13849-1:2006) and for use in SIL2 or
SIL3 systems (according to IEC 62061)
depending on application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, and TÜV
Outputs (Guard Door Closed, Actuator in Place)
Auxiliary Output Switching
300V DC, 250V AC, 0.5 A including inrush.
15V A/10 W suitable for AC/DC circuits
Operating Characteristics
Sensing Distance, Make
[mm (in.)]
Style
Style
Style
Style
S1:
S2:
S3:
S4:
5 (0.20)
9 (0.35)
5 (0.20)
10 (0.39)
Sensing Distance, Break
[mm (in.)]
Style
Style
Style
Style
S1:
S2:
S3:
S4:
11
12
12
13
(0.43)
(0.47)
(0.47)
(0.51)
Environmental
Features
3-Interlock
Switches
Non-contact actuation
Magnetic coded sensing
Four housing styles
Must be operated with its own safety control unit
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67 (NEMA 6P)
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
S1, S2, S3: -10…+55° (+14…+131°)
S4 (GD2): -25…+125° (-13…+257°)
Vibration
1 mm, 10…55 Hz
Shock
30 g, 11 ms half-sine
Physical Characteristics
Operator
Interface
Cable Size
0.54 mm2 (20 AWG) 4-wire PVC Jacket
OD—4 mm (0.16 in.)
Material
S1, S2: Molded ABS
S30 (Actuator): Polyester
S31 (Sensor): Nylon (Trogamid)
S4 (GD2): Stainless Steel
Mounting
Any position
Weight [g (lbs)]
S1:
S2:
S3:
S4:
Sensor:
Sensor:
Sensor:
Sensor:
18 (0.04); Actuator: 15 (0.03)
20 (0.04); Actuator: 30 (0.07)
18 (0.04) Actuator: 6 (0.01)
150 (0.33); Actuator: 170 (0.37)
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-86
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-87
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Sipha™ Sensors
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Type
None
S11
1 N.C.
S12
1 N.O.
S1
S13
ABS plastic
None
S21
1 N.C.
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
S2
Actuator: Polyester
Sensor: Nylon
[Trogamid]
S22
1 N.O.
S23
None
S31
S3
1 N.C.
Connection
Cat. No.
3 m Cable
440N-S32014
10 m Cable
440N-S32016
3 m Cable
440N-S32022
10 m Cable
440N-S32032
3 m Cable
440N-S32037
10 m Cable
440N-S32036
3 m Cable
440N-S32015
10 m Cable
440N-S32017
3 m Cable
440N-S32023
10 m Cable
440N-S32033
3 m Cable
440N-S32038
10 m Cable
440N-S32039
3 m Cable
440N-S32101
4-Pin Micro (M12)
440N-S32024
8-Pin Micro (M12)
440N-S32047
3 m Cable
440N-S32055
S42
Stainless Steel
1 N.O.
10 m Cable
440N-S32056
8-Pin Micro (M12)
440N-S32046
3 m Cable
440N-S32053
10 m Cable
440N-S32054
S43
S4
1-
Housing Material
2-Opto-electronics
Housing
Style
General
Product Selection
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary
Contacts
Housing Width
Type
24V AC/DC
1 N.O.
1 N.C. Solid State
22.5 mm
Control Unit 1
24V AC/DC;
115/230V AC
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
45 mm
Control Unit 2
24V AC/DC;
115/230V AC
2 N.O. + 1 N.O.
delayed
1 N.C.
90 mm
Sipha 6
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
440N-S32013
5-74
440N-S32021
440N-S32052
Connection Systems
Description
4-Pin Micro (M12)
Cordset
Patchcord
8-Pin Micro (M12)
889D-F4ECA-1
889D-F8AB-1
889D-F4ECRM-
889D-F8ABDM-
Operator
Interface
Supply Voltage
Logic
Housing
3-Interlock
Switches
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Power
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-87
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-88
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Sipha™ Sensors
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Sipha S2
4.2 (0.17)
8
= (0.31)
=
7 (0.28)
41 (1.61)
82 (3.23)
73 (2.87)
=
=
Sipha S10
41 (1.61)
7 (0.28)
41 (1.61)
82 (3.23)
9 (0.35)
41 (1.61)
5 (0.2)
4.5 (0.18)
5 (0.2)
7 (0.28)
19 (0.75)
19
(0.75)
Sipha S21, S22, S23
19
(0.75)
Sipha S20
Ø 30 (1.18)
=
=
19.5
(0.77)
=
Ø 5.1 (0.2)
=
=
16
(0.63)
=
5 (0.2)
=
8 (0.31)
5 (0.2)
=
=
=
3-Interlock
Switches
10
(0.39)
M18
33.5
(1.32)
11.5
(0.45)
Sipha S31
4.4
(0.17)
11.5
(0.45)
8 (0.31)
49 (1.93)
62.5 (2.46)
mm (in)
60 (2.36)
6 (0.24)
mm (in)
8 (0.31)
Sipha S4
78.5 (3.09)
Sipha S3
62.5 (2.46)
2-Opto-electronics
19
(0.75)
78.5 (3.09)
1-
Sipha S11, S12, S13
4.5 (0.18)
22 (0.87)
2 x M4
4.8 (0.19)
25 (0.98) 12 (0.47)
4.2 (0.17)
7 (0.28)
13 (0.51)
mm (in)
68 (2.68)
2 x M4
25 (0.98)
48 (1.89)
5.5 (0.22)
24 (0.94)
22 (0.87)
Ø 4.2
12
(0.47)
24 (0.94)
13 (0.51)
4.8 (0.19)
6 (0.24)
48 (1.89)
mm (in)
24 (0.94)
General
Sipha S1
4.4 (0.17)
16
(0.63)
=
19.5
(0.77)
=
33.5
(1.32)
Sipha S30
Sipha S42, S43
Sipha S40
Operator
Interface
Accessories
Description
Cat. No.
Actuator S10
440N-A32019
Actuator S20
440N-A32020
Actuator S30
440N-A32025
Actuator S40 (GD2)
440N-A32041
Bag of 40 washers for S2 models
440N-A17127
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-88
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_3_Noncontact
5/3/2010
11:13 AM
Page 3-89
Safety Switches
Non-Contact Switches
Sipha™ Sensors
Description
Red
Blue
Yellow
Cable Versions
Green
S11, S21
S42, S12, S22
S43, S13, S23
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
1 N.C. + 2 N.O.
Safety A_N.C.
Safety A_N.C.
Safety A_N.C.
Safety B_N.O.
Safety B_N.O.
Safety B_N.O.
—
Aux A_N.C.
Aux A_N.O.
—
External Ground
External Ground
S42
S43
—
—
Black
White
Green/Yellow
Description
S31
General
Typical Wiring Diagrams
4-Pin Micro (M12)
3-Safety A NC
1-Safety A NC
1-
2-Safety B NO
Safety B NO
2-Safety A N.C.
1-Safety A N.C.
3-Ground
8-Safety B N.O.
4-Safety B N.O.
4-Safety B N.O.
7-NA
6-Aux A N.C.
5-Aux A N.C.
Brown
Safety A_N.C.
—
—
Safety B_N.O.
—
—
White
Brown
Safety A
Safety A_N.C.
Safety A_N.C.
Red
Yellow
Safety B
Safety B_N.O.
Safety B_N.O.
Grey
Pink
Aux A
Aux A_N.C.
Aux A_N.O.
Green
Blue
NA
Gnd
Gnd
Blue
4-Pin Cordset
889D-F4AC-1
White
Black
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
7-NA
6-Aux A N.O.
5-Aux A N.O.
2-Opto-electronics
—
3-Interlock
Switches
8-Pin Micro (M12)
2-Safety A N.C.
1-Safety A N.C.
3-Ground
8-Safety B N.O.
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-89
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-90
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite™
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
1-
Standards
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1
May be suitable for use in Cat 3 or
Cat 4 systems depending on the
architecture and application
characteristics
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
load
PFHD: < 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
May be suitable for use in
performance levels Ple or Pld systems
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and
for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending
on the architecture and application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable
directives, cULus NRTL/C and TÜV
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Sprite is a hinge-actuated safety interlock switch in a compact
housing—only 75 x 25 x 29 mm (2.95 x 0.98 x 1.14 in.)—making it
the smallest interlock currently available. The Sprite has been
designed for smaller machines such as printing machines, copiers
and domestic machinery, which until now, have been able to use
standard safety interlocks due to space restrictions. Despite its
small size, the Sprite includes the necessary safety-related
functions, such as forced-guided contacts and a tamper-resistant
mechanism allowing machinery to be safeguarded in compliance
with the machinery directive.
The shaft of the Sprite is connected to the existing hinge pin and
the degree of operation can be adjusted to suit the application via
the adjustable cam in the switch head.
3-Interlock
Switches
IMPORTANT: After adjustment, the cam
must be secured in position with the
supplied cam locking pin to ensure optimal
performance.
Outputs
Safety Contacts 2 N.C. directopening action
1 N.C. directopening action
Auxiliary Contacts
—
1 N.O.
Maximum 11°; Minimum 3°
Shaft Rotation for Contact Operation
(adjustable)
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
DC-13
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3A
6A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Operator
Interface
Features
Operating Characteristics
Ideal for small, light-weight guards
The smallest hinge interlock switch available, 75 x 25 mm case
Degree of operation can customized with adjustable cam
Contacts, 2 N.C. or 1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Four possible shaft positions, easy to install
Break Contact Force, Min.
8 cNm (torque on shaft)
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
1 cycle/s
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1,000,000 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+80° (-4…176°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Shaft Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
80 (0.176)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data is based on the B10d
Logic
value given and:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-90
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-91
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite™
Product Selection
Cat. No.
M16 Conduit
Auxiliary
Action
Shaft Type
Solid
2 N.C.
—
—
Pre-Bored
Solid
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
Pre-Bored
Actuator Shaft
Dimensions—mm (in)
M16
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
4-Pin Micro
(M12)
Connect to
ArmorBlock Guard
I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)
80 x Ø10 (3.14 x 0.39)
440H-S34019
440H-S34023
440H-S34027
⎯
60 x Ø8 (2.36 x 0.31)
440H-S34020
440H-S34024
440H-S34028
50 x Ø10(1.96 x 0.39)
440H-S34010
440H-S34017
440H-S34014
⎯
440H-S2NNPPS
30 x Ø16 (1.18 x 0.63)
bore Ø9.5 (0.37)
440H-S34033
440H-S34034
440H-S34035
440H-S2NNHPS
80 x Ø10 (3.14 x 0.39)
440H-S34021
440H-S34025
440H-S34029
⎯
60 x Ø8 (2.36 x 0.31)
440H-S34022
440H-S34026
440H-S34030
⎯
50 x Ø10(1.96 x 0.39)
440H-S34012
440H-S34018
440H-S34015
⎯
30 x Ø16 (1.18 x 0.63)
bore Ø9.5 (0.37)
440H-S34036
⎯
⎯
⎯
1-
Safety
Connector§
General
Contact
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
440R-N23135
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR9T
2 N.O.
1 N.C.
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-14
440R-F23027
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State
1 N.O. Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
MSR33RT
2 N.O. Solid State
1 N.O.
Removable
Auto. or Monitored
Manual
24V DC SELV
5-18
440R-F23200
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Connection Systems
5-Pin Micro (M12) for ArmorBlock
Guard I/O
Description
2 N.C.
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
889D-F4AC-1
889D-F4AC-1
—
889D-F4ACDM-
889D-F4ACDM-
889D-F5ACDM-1
Distribution Box
889D-4‡LT-DM4
898D-F4‡KT-DM4
—
Shorting Plug
889D-41LU-DM
898D-41KU-DM
—
889D-43LY-D4
898D-43KY-D4
—
Cordset
Patchcord
T-Port
2 N.C.
Logic
4-Pin Micro (M12)
3-Interlock
Switches
Description
Single-Function Safety Relays
Operator
Interface
Recommended Logic Interfaces
2-Opto-electronics
§ For connector ratings, see page 3-9.
Power
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
‡ Replace symbol with 4 or 8 for number of ports.
Note: For additional information, see the Safety Connection System section (page 7-1) of this catalog.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-91
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-92
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite™
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
# = mm (in)
75 (2.95)
2 x M4
25 (0.98)
1mm (in)
A, Ø
10 (0.39)
8 (0.31)
10 (0.39)
3 (0.12)
12.5 (0.49)
B
3 (0.12)
34.5 (1.36)
36 (1.42)
12.5 (0.49)
18 (0.71)
16.5 (0.65)
12.5
(0.49)
29 (1.14)
1 x M16
B
80 (3.14)
60 (2.36)
50 (1.96)
A
2-Opto-electronics
Hollow Shaft
5 (0.2)
2 holes 3.2 (0.12) Dia.
30
(1.18)
13
(0.51)
25.5
(1.0)
5 (0.2)
3-Interlock
Switches
8
(0.31)
2 holes M4 in line
16
(0.63) Dia.
9.5
(0.37) Dia.
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-92
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-93
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Sprite™
Typical Wiring Diagrams
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
2 N.C.
General
Description
11
12
Safety A (NC)
11
12
Safety A (NC)
23
24
Aux A (NO)
21
22
Safety B (NC)
Open
Closed
3.3
0 mm
Safety A
Aux A
6
3.3
3.8
2-Aux A
4-Pin Micro (M12)
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
2-Safety B
3-Safety A
1-Safety A
4-Safety B
4-Aux A
2-Safety A
5-Safety B
5-Pin Micro (M12)
For ArmorBlock Guard I/O
0 mm
Safety A
Safety B
2-Opto-electronics
6
Contact Action
1-
Contact Configuration
—
1-Safety A
3-N/A
Blue
Cordset
889D-F4AC-1
White
Black
Safety A
Safety A
Aux A
Safety B
3-Interlock
Switches
4-Safety B
Brown
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-93
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-94
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign™ 3
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 device per EN 954-1 dual
channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3
or 4 systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
load
PFHD: < 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
May be suitable for use in
performance levels Ple or Pld systems
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and
for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending
on the architecture and application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable
directives, cULus, and TÜV
1-
Standards
Description
The Ensign 3 is a hinge-actuated safety-interlock switch designed to
fit at the hinge point of guards. With its rotatable head, the versatile
Ensign 3 offers up to four different mounting options.
2-Opto-electronics
Operation of the unit is achieved by the hinging action of the guard.
The actuation shaft is connected to the existing hinge pin and the
degree of operation can be adjusted to suit the application via the
adjustable cam in the switch head.
IMPORTANT: After adjustment, the cam
must be secured in position with the
supplied cam locking pin to ensure safety
function performance.
3-Interlock
Switches
The switch includes the necessary safety-related functions, such as
forced-guided contacts and a tamper-resistant mechanism, allowing
machinery to be safeguarded in compliance with the machinery
directive. It is sealed to IP67 and has one conduit entry, M16 or
connector style.
Outputs
Safety Contacts 3 N.C. directopening action
2 N.C. directopening action
Auxiliary Contacts
—
1 N.O.
3 N.C. Adjustable 12° max.: 3° min.
2 N.C. 1 N.O. (BBM) Adjustable
Shaft Rotation for Contact Operation 14° max.: 5° min.
2 N.C. 1 N.O. (MBB) Adjustable
12° max.: 3° min.
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
DC-13
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3A
6A
(Ue) 24V
(le) 2 A
Features
Operator
Interface
Compact size—90.5 x 31 x 30.4 mm (3.56 x 1.22 x 1.2 in) housing
Ideal for small, lightweight guards
Degree of operation can be customized with adjustable cam
Contacts, 2 N.C. & 1 N.O. or 3 N.C. (sealed to IP67)
Four possible shaft positions, easy to install
Solid and hollow shafts available
Operating Characteristics
Break Contact Force, Min.
8 cNm (torque on shaft)
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
1 cycle/s
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
1,000,000 operations
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+80° (-4…176°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Shaft Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
100 (0.22)
Color
Red
Logic
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data is based on the B10d
value given and:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-94
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-95
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign™ 3
Product Selection
Cat. No.
Connector
M16 Conduit
Action
80 x Ø10 (3.14 x 0.39)
60 x Ø8 (2.36 x 0.31)
3 N.C.
—
—
Solid
50 x Ø10 (1.96 x 0.39)
30 x Ø16 (1.18 x 0.63)
bore Ø9.5 (0.37)
BBM
Pre-bored
2 N.C.
Solid
50 x Ø10 (1.96 x 0.39)
30 x Ø16 (1.18 x 0.63)
bore Ø9.5 (0.37)
1 N.O.
Pre-bored
80 x Ø10 (3.14 x 0.39)
60 x Ø8 (2.36 x 0.31)
MBB
Solid
50 x Ø10 (1.96 x 0.39)
30 x Ø16 (1.18 x 0.63)
bore Ø9.5 (0.37)
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
6-Pin Micro
(M12)
440H-E22025 440H-E22050 440H-E22059
—
440H-E22031 440H-E22051 440H-E22060
—
440H-E22047 440H-E22052 440H-E22061 440H-E2NNPPS
80 x Ø10 (3.14 x 0.39)
60 x Ø8 (2.36 x 0.31)
M16
Shaft Type
Pre-bored
440H-E22067 440H-E22068 440H-E22069 440H-E2NNHPS
440H-E22027 440H-E22053 440H-E22037
—
440H-E22033 440H-E22054 440H-E22039
—
440H-E22048 440H-E22055 440H-E22062
—
440H-E22064 440H-E22065 440H-E22066
—
440H-E22029 440H-E22056 440H-E22038
—
440H-E22035 440H-E22057 440H-E22040
—
440H-E22049 440H-E22058 440H-E22063
—
440H-E22070 440H-E22071 440H-E22072
—
1 With a 5-pin micro (M12) connector, not all contacts are connected. See page 3-97 for wiring details.
For connector ratings, see 3-9.
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Description
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
1-
Auxiliary
2-Opto-electronics
Safety
Actuator
Shaft Dimensions—
mm (in)
Connect to
ArmorBlock
Guard I/O
5-Pin Micro
(M12) 1
General
Contact
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable (Screw)
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
1 N.O. Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State
Modular Safety Relays
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Operator
Interface
MSR127RP
MSR127TP
3-Interlock
Switches
Single-Function Safety Relays
Description
Cordset
Patchcord
Distribution Box
Shorting Plug
6-Pin Micro
Connections to ArmorBlock Guard I/O
5-Pin Micro (M12)
3 N.C.-2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
3 N.C.
889R-F6ECA-‡
—
889R-F6ECRM-§
889D-F5ACDM-‡
898R-P68MT-A5
—
898R-P61MU-RM
—
Logic
Connection Systems
Power
‡ Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
§ Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-95
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-96
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign™ 3
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
30.4 (1.2)
3 (0.12)
13
(0.51)
25 (0.98)
20 (0.79)
22 (0.87)
31 (1.22)
General
25 (0.98)
1 x M16
2 x M4
34.4 (1.35)
36.4 (1.43)
38.4 (1.51)
1mm (in)
A, Ø
10 (0.39)
8 (0.31)
10 (0.39)
B
90.5 (3.56)
B
80 (3.14)
60 (2.36)
50 (1.96)
12.5 (0.49)
A
Hollow Shaft
2-Opto-electronics
5
(0.2)
2 holes 3.2 (0.12) Dia.
30
(1.18)
13
(0.51)
25.5
(1.0)
5 (0.2)
8
(0.31)
2 holes M4 in line
16
(0.63) Dia.
9.5
(0.37) Dia.
3-Interlock
Switches
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-96
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-97
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Ensign™ 3
Typical Wiring Diagrams
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
3 N.C.
General
Description
Contact Configuration
11
12
Safety A
Safety B
21
22
Safety B
Aux A
31
32
Safety C
11
12
Safety A
21
22
34
1-
33
5°
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Contact Action
0°
5°
0°
Safety A
Safety B
Safety C
6°
BBM
Closed
0°
2-Opto-electronics
4°
Open
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
3°
MBB
2-Safety A
5-Safety B
—
1-Safety A
3-NA
6-Safety B
2-Safety B
3-Aux A
4-Aux A
5 Red/Black
2 Red
Cordset
889R-F6ECA-1
6 Red/Blue
3 Green
4 Red/Yellow
2-Safety B
4-Safety C
1-Safety A
5-Safety A
1 Red/White
6-Safety B
3-Safety C
1-Safety A
5-Safety A
Safety A
Safety A
Safety B
Safety B
Aux A
Safety C
Operator
Interface
6-Pin Micro (M12)
4-Safety B
3-Interlock
Switches
5-Pin Micro (M12)
For ArmorBlock Guard I/O
Power
Logic
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-97
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-98
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam™
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
EN954-1, ISO13849-1, IEC/EN602041, NFPA79, EN1088, ISO14119, IEC/
EN60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19,
AS4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual
channel interlocks suitable for Cat. 3
or 4 systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
load
PFHD: < 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
May be suitable for use in
performance levels Ple or Pld systems
(according to ISO 13849-1:2006) and
for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending
on the architecture and application
characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable
directives, cULus, SUVA, and TÜV
1-
Standards
Description
2-Opto-electronics
The Rotacam is heavy-duty, hinge-actuated safety-interlock switch.
It can be used as, or connected to, the existing hinge pin for direct
operation of the switch. Machine power is isolated when the guard
has been opened just 5°. For applications requiring a larger degree
of operation, the internal cam can be adjusted from 5…11°.
IMPORTANT: After adjustment, the cam
must be secured in position with the
supplied cam locking pin to ensure optimal
performance.
3-Interlock
Switches
The Rotacam is available with two N.C. safety contacts and one
N.O. auxiliary contact. The switch includes the necessary safetyrelated functions, such as forced-guided contacts and a tamperresistant mechanism, allowing machinery to be safeguarded in
compliance with the machinery directive.
Outputs
Safety Contacts 2 N.C. direct opening action
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Shaft Rotation for Contact Operation
11° maximum;
5° minimum, (adjustable)
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
5 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
DC-13
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3A
6A
(Ue) 24V
The die-cast housing is sealed to IP66 and features one M20
conduit entry (1/2 inch NPT and connector style also available). Two
different shaft lengths of 30 mm and 85 mm can also be specified.
Operating Characteristics
EX and Pneumatic styles of Rotacam are also available; see
page 9-10 for more information.
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Frequency, Max.
1 cycle/s
Operating Life @ 100 mA load
>1,000,000 operations
Features
(le) 2 A
Break Contact Force, Min.
12 cNm (torque on shaft)
Environmental
Operator
Interface
Can be used as a hinge pin on light- and medium-weight guard
doors
Isolates power within 5° of door movement
Degree of operation can be customized with adjustable cam
Robust die-cast case, ideal for heavy-duty applications
Contacts, 2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Enclosure Type Rating
IP66
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-20…+80° (-4…176°)
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Heavy-duty die-cast alloy
Shaft Material
Stainless Steel
Weight [g (lb)]
420 (0.926)
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data is based on the B10d
Logic
value given and:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-98
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-99
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam™
Product Selection
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
Contact Action
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
M20
1/2 inch NPT
Adaptor
Connector§
8-Pin Micro
(M12)
Shaft Dimensions
Operating Shaft Type
L = 30 (1.18)
D = 16 (0.63)
Pre-Bored
440H-R03074 440H-R03078 440H-R03111
L = 85 (3.35)
D = 12.7 (0.5)
Solid
440H-R03079 440H-R03088 440H-R03112
General
Cat. No.
M20 Conduit
§ For connector ratings, see 3-9.
Safety Outputs
Auxiliary Outputs
Terminals
Reset Type
Power Supply
Cat. Page No.
Cat. No.
MSR127RP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
Monitored Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23135
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-26
440R-N23132
MSR127TP
3 N.O.
1 N.C.
Removable
(Screw)
MSR126T
2 N.O.
None
Fixed
Auto./Manual
24V AC/DC
5-24
440R-N23117
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC
5-16
440R-N23198
MSR30RT
2 N.O. Solid State 1 N.O. Solid State
Modular Safety Relays
2 N.O.
1 N.C. and 2 PNP
Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual or
Monitored Manual
24V DC from the
base unit
5-82
440R-H23176
MSR220P Input
Module
—
—
Removable
—
24V DC
5-86
440R-H23178
MSR310P Base
MSR300 Series
Output Modules
3 PNP Solid State
Removable
Auto./Manual Monitored
Manual
24V DC
5-102
440R-W23219
MSR320P Input
Module
—
2 PNP Solid State
Removable
—
24V DC from the
base unit
5-106
440R-W23218
3-Interlock
Switches
MSR210P Base
2 N.C. only
2-Opto-electronics
Description
Single-Function Safety Relays
1-
Recommended Logic Interfaces
Note: For additional Safety Relays connectivity, see page 5-12.
For additional Safety I/O and Safety PLC connectivity, see page 5-116.
For application and wiring diagrams, see page 10-1.
Connection Systems
8-Pin Micro (M12)
Description
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
889D-F8AB-1
Cordset
Patchcord
Distribution Box
—
Shorting Plug
—
T-Port
—
Operator
Interface
889D-F8ABDM-
Power
Logic
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Replace symbol with 1 (1 m), 2 (2 m), 3 (3 m), 5 (5 m), or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Note: For additional information, see page 7-1.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-99
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-100
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam™
Approximate Dimensions
6.5 (0.26)
General
3.5 (0.14)
14.5 (0.57)
Dimensions are shown in mm (in.). Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
99 (3.9)
23.5 (0.93)
38 (1.5)
6.5 (0.26)
6.5
(0.26)
L
M4
M5 Tapped
D
65 (2.56)
52 (2.05)
36 (1.42)
24 (0.94)
86 (3.39)
1"A"
M5 Tapped
15.5 (0.61)
M4
# = mm (in)
2-Opto-electronics
L
D
Rotacam HS-2
30mm (1.18)
16mm (0.63)
Rotacam P85
85mm (3.35)
12.7mm (0.5)
Ø 3.2mm (0.13)
5 (0.2)
25 (0.98)
"A"
8 (0.31)
13 (0.51)
3-Interlock
Switches
Ø 9.5 (0.37)
2 x M4 (Rotacam HS-2)
Note: Holes only on pre-bored models.
Note: 2D, 3D and electrical drawings are available on www.ab.com.
Operator
Interface
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalog
3-100
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_4_Hinge
5/3/2010
11:15 AM
Page 3-101
Interlock Switches
Hinge Switches
Rotacam™
Typical Wiring Diagrams
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
General
Description
11
12
Safety A
21
22
Safety B
33
34
Aux A
5
Contact Action
Open
0mm
1-
Contact Configuration
Safety A
Safety B
Aux A
Closed
6
8-Pin Micro (M12)
Pin 2 Not Connected
2-Opto-electronics
2-N/A
1-Safety A
3-Aux A
8-Ground
4-Aux A
8-Pin Cordset
889D-F8AB-1
White
Blue
Safety A
Grey
Pink
Safety B
Green
Yellow
Aux A
Red
Ground
Brown
Not Connected
3-Interlock
Switches
7-Safety A
6-Safety B
5-Safety B
Power
Logic
Operator
Interface
1 Replace symbol with 2 (2 m), 5 (5 m) or 10 (10 m) for standard cable lengths.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-101
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-102
Safety Switches
Trapped Key Switches
Overview
General
Principles
CNC precision cut keys
Interlocking and Control Solutions
9-
Trapped Key Interlocks—Why Use Them?
CE Marking—Tested and Approved
Based upon the premise that no one key can be in two places at
once, key interlock systems can be configured to provide that a
predetermined sequence of events takes place or that hazards have
been reduced before operators can become exposed to them.
Only Prosafe products carry the prestigious BG mark. A sign of
safety, independently tested by the German Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Arbeitssicherheit, "BIA." Additional tests for
valve interlocks include Lloyds Certificate for fire test and salt-mist
resistance.
It is a mechanical system and is therefore widely used in
applications including those where the location of plant,
environment or explosive atmospheres make the use of electrical
interlock systems unsuitable or expensive to install. In addition,
unique coding can be provided, leading to a greater degree of
security and tamper-resistance.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Why Prosafe?
In order to derive the full benefits from a trapped key interlocking
system its components must be totally practical, easily maintainable
and readily available. Prosafe's unique key and code barrel gives the
ability for even complicated interlocking systems and spare parts to
be ordered from our worldwide network of distributors—fast! A first
for trapped key interlocks.
Over 100,000 Operations
Prosafe products have been subjected to independent, exhaustive
testing. With only a small amount of lubricant added infrequently,
keys were inserted, rotated and removed at a rate of 12 times per
minute. After 100,000 operations (at 10 operations a day this is
equivalent to 27 years) the unit was functioning satisfactorily and
most importantly would "pass" only the original or equivalent new
key. No incorrect keys could operate the lock, underlining the unit's
integrity as well as longevity.
Five Unique Prosafe Benefits
11-Cat. No.
Index
Compare the following to other trapped key manufacturers:
1. All stainless interlocking and coded parts—including the code
barrel and internal components at no extra cost.
2. Weather cap as standard—no extra charge for dust caps and
seals.
3. Standard red color-coded key and ID tags—at no extra charge.
4. Custom color/text keys and ID tags—nominal extra charge.
5. A complete range of isolators, key exchange, miniature valve
interlocks and gate interlocks—all using the same key principle.
The Prosafe Advantage
Logic
Stainless steel
construction.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-102
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-103
Safety Switches
Trapped Key Switches
Overview
General
The Advantage
Principles
Weather cap supplied as
standard with color
coded tagging.
Code barrels: Factory assembled
to ensure safety integrity. Internal
components are captive within
the code barrel.
Rugged and reliable
push-pull operation
no springs or cams to fail.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
9-
Tamper-resistant
screws
11-Cat. No.
Index
All stainless steel
construction
Prosafe Keys
Power
Logic
Compact, solid and sturdy keys supplied
with dust seals and coded tagging. Optional
colors/text are available.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-103
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-104
Safety Switches
Trapped Key Switches
Overview
Design Suggestions for an Interlocking System
Plant and Machinery Interlocking
General
Primary hazards
(Power isolation)
Auxiliary hazards
Key control element
Guarded area access
Ancillary functions
Bolt lock for
sliding guards
A
A
B
A
C
B
Rotary key switch
Timed delay unit
Principles
A
3 Port spool valve
B
9-
Consider removal of all
power providing kinetic
energy to the system i.e.,
electrical motors,
pressurized air, etc.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Comments
Consider factors such as
run down and
environmental factors
such as hazardous
(explosive) atmospheres.
Use EEX isolator and
timed delay units where
necessary.
Access lock for general duty
sliding, hinge and lift off
guards
Required when more than
one hazard element needs
isolation or more than one
exposure/access point
interlocking.
Consider if the hazard is removed
immediately i.e.,
a) Machine run on due to momentum.
b) Pressurization of hydraulic or
pneumatic systems.
c) Stored energy such as capacitance or
static electricity.
d) Temperature, either hot or cold,
creating a hazard.
Rotary key switch
C
Solenoid key release
unit coupled to
temperature or
pressure switch
sensors
Bolt lock off device for
grounding and
capacitive discharge
D
C
C
Comments
Consider sequentially
interlocking all primary
sources of hazard so all are
eliminated. In turn, releasing
a single key to input in key
control element. Additional
monitoring, isolation or
control functions such as
switches or solenoid locks
may be incorporated at this
stage to eliminate other
elements.
C
D
3 Port spool valve
Chain interlock for large or
poorly aligned sliding, hinge
and lift off guards
To gain access to the danger
zone.
C
D
Comments
Consider 2 key versions to provide
a) Personnel key exchange types to
prevent operator lock-in (whole
body access applications only).
b) Lock out devices requiring 2 keys in
from different sources to enable
controlled access.
Required when additional
functions such as
programming/machine
resetting are necessary.
Comments
Two key versions
required at access points
to facilitate this feature.
11-Cat. No.
Index
Logic
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel
construction.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-104
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-105
Safety Switches
Trapped Key Switches
Overview
AB AC
DAL
‘AB’ key in then ‘AC’
key out to open guard door.
AC
RKS
To energize robot
teach mode.
Sequence of Operation
1. The ETU isolator has two keys. One is a nonremovable key. The
other key (a "AA" coded key) can be removed after a timed
duration, which is set by a potentiometer inside the ETU isolator.
Turn the nonremovable key to turn the hazardous machine
motion off and start the timer. When the time expires, the Key
Free LED turns ON. Remove the "AA" key.
2. Insert the "AA" key into the Key Exchange Unit (KEX) and turn it
90°.
3. Turn one of the "AB" keys 90° and remove it from the KEX. This
traps the "AA" key in the KEX and prevents the restarting of the
machine.
4. Insert the "AB" key into the Single-key Bolt Lock (SBL) and turn it
90° to gain partial body access to the machine.
5. Turn the second "AB" key 90° and remove it from the KEX.
Removal of this key also traps the "A" key in the KEX and
prevents the restarting of the machine.
6. Insert the "AB" key into the Dual-key Access Lock (DAL) and turn
it 90°.
7. Turn the "AC" key 90° and remove the "C" key. Rotate the access
handle to allow full body entry into the hazard zone.
8. Take the "AC" key into the hazard zone, insert it into the rotary
key switch (RKSE) and turn it 90° to send a signal to the machine
control system, to allow the machine to operate in a slow or
teach mode.
9. Reverse the process to return the machine to full operational
mode.
Bill of Materials
Item
Quantity
Description
Cat. No.
1
1
Single Key Time Delayed with an AA Primary Key
440T-MSTUE11AA
2
1
Key Exchange Unit, AB Primary Key, Two B Secondary Keys Trapped (included)
440T-MKEXE11AAABAB
3
1
Single Bolt Lock, AB Primary Key
440T-MSBLE10AB
4
1
Dual Access Lock, AB Primary Key, C Secondary Key Trapped (included)
440T-MDALE10ABAC
5
1
Rotary Key Switch, AC Primary Code Barrel
440T-MRKSE10AC
6
1
AA Key
440T-AKEYE10AA
Power
Logic
Note: Primary keys must be ordered separately, when not provided for by a previous sequential trapped key. In the example above, only one primary key must be
ordered separately. The remaining primary keys are provided by a previous sequential secondary (trapped) key.
9-
AB
SBL
‘AB’ key in to retract bolt
from guard door.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
AA AB AB
KEX
Trapped key ‘AA’
Locking off ETU,
Release access door lock, key ‘AB’.
11-Cat. No.
Index
AA
ETU
Isolator with timed delay
key release
Principles
General
Illustrated Principles of Trapped Key Interlocking
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-105
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-106
Safety Switches
Trapped Key Switches
Overview
Code Selection
Ordering Prosafe trapped key products requires codes to be included in the cat. no.
General
The codes are added to the end of the cat. no.
Each code must be two characters in length.
The first code(s) is the primary code and the last code(s), if necessary, are the secondary code(s).
Primary codes do not include the key. The key must be ordered separately or must come from a previous operation.
Secondary codes come complete with a key, as the key is trapped in the code barrel.
Use the tables on page 3-107 to select and track codes.
Ordering Example 1
Principles
440T
M
DALE
10
*
Two character
Secondary code (Key included)
Two character
Primary Code (Key not included)
Product Feature
Product Type (Dual-key Access Lock)
M = Machine Interlock
A = Accessory
Bulletin Number (T = Trapped Key)
9-
Order Cat. No. 440TMDALE100AAAB to get a Dual key Access Lock with an "AA" primary code and a "AB" secondary code, with a "AB" key
included.
Ordering Example 2
3-Trapped Key
Switches
440T
M
KEXE
16
* *
Two character
Secondary code (Key included)
Two character
Secondary code (Key included)
Two character
Secondary code (Key included)
Two character
Primary Code (Key not included)
Two character
Primary Code (Key not included)
Product Feature
11-Cat. No.
Index
Product Type (Dual-key Access Lock)
M = Machine Interlock
A = Accessory
Bulletin Number (T = Trapped Key)
Order Cat. No. 440TMKEXE16AAABACACAC to get a key exchange unit with "AA" and "AB" primary codes and three "AC" secondary codes.
The "AA" and "AB" keys are not included. The three "AC" keys, which are trapped in the secondary code barrels, are included.
Logic
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel
construction.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-106
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-107
Safety Switches
Trapped Key Switches
Overview
Key Coding
General
Below is an example reference guide that is useful in selecting and
tracking codes. Start down the Aa column as the lower codes (typically Aa
to Za) are stocked. The chart continues on to Zz. Note that there are only
24 letters used—O & Q are not used.
Principles
Codes are ordered with upper case letters. Labels with two letter codes
will show the first letter in the upper case and the second letter in lower
case.
Application
& Date
Code
Application
& Date
Code
Application
& Date
Code
Application
& Date
Code
Aa
Ab
Ac
Ad
Ae
Af
Ba
Bb
Bc
Bd
Be
Bf
Ca
Cb
Cc
Cd
Ce
Cf
Da
Db
Dc
Dd
De
Df
Ea
Eb
Ec
Ed
Ee
Ef
Fa
Fb
Fc
Fd
Fe
Ff
Ga
Gb
Gc
Gd
Ge
Gf
Ha
Hb
Hc
Hd
He
Hf
Ia
Ib
Ic
Id
Ie
If
Ja
Jb
Jc
Jd
Je
Jf
Ka
Kb
Kc
Kd
Ke
Kf
La
Lb
Lc
Ld
Le
Lf
Ma
Mb
Mc
Md
Me
Mf
Na
Nb
Nc
Nd
Ne
Nf
Pa
Pb
Pc
Pd
Pe
Pf
Ra
Rb
Rc
Rd
Re
Rf
Sa
Sb
Sc
Sd
Se
Sf
Ta
Tb
Tc
Td
Te
Tf
Ua
Ub
Uc
Ud
Ue
Uf
Va
Vb
Vc
Vd
Ve
Vf
Wa
Wb
Wc
Wd
We
Wf
Xb
Xc
Xd
Xe
Xf
Ya
Yb
Yc
Yd
Ye
Yf
Za
Zb
Zc
Zd
Ze
Zf
Power
Logic
Xa
Application
& Date
9-
Code
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Application
& Date
11-Cat. No.
Index
Code
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-107
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-108
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Specifications (continued)
General
Weight [g (lbs)]
10, 11,
RPSE 12, 13,
20:
500 (1.1) 14, 16:
1000
(2.2)
10, 11,
12, 13:
850 (1.9) 14, 16:
1250
(2.8)
RKSE
Principles
The rotary switches are used for electrical isolation of machinery to
improve safe access and also as teach boxes in robot cells. Once
the power has been turned off, the key can then be withdrawn and
used in the next sequence of operation such as unlocking an
access hatch or allowing valves to be operated.
9-
The rotary switch can either be mounted in a panel or purchased in
an enclosure. The rotary switch is available with 4 poles, either 4
N.O. or 2 N.C. and 2 N.O. The 100 A 4 N.O. switch has 3 contacts
rated at 100 A and 1 contact rated at 20 A.
Features
3-Trapped Key
Switches
316L stainless steel keys
Direct drive operation—positively opens contacts
Stainless steel dust cap included
Up to 400 A isolation
4 N.O., 2 N.O. and 2 N.C., 3 N.O./1 N.C., 3 N.O., or 3 N.C. and
neutral contacts
Replaceable code barrel assembly
Specifications
11-Cat. No.
Index
Certifications
EN1088, IEC/EN60204-1, IEC/EN609475-1, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET19, AS4024.1, UL508, CSA 22.2
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, and 4 systems
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
BG, cULus on contact block; C-Tick not
required
Operating Characteristics
Conduit Entry
Climatic Test
Constant to DIN IEC 68 Part 2-3
Variable to DIN IEC 68 Part 2-30
Ambient Temperature, Operation
Encased -25…40 °C (10…104 °F)
(Ui) Rated Insulation Voltage
690V
(Uimp) Rated Impulse withstand
Voltage
6 kV
Last two digits of Cat. No. (See
Product Selection table)
Rated
Uninterrupted
Current (Iu)
Rated Operational
Voltage (Ue)
Rated Operational
Current (Ie)
13
14
IEC/EN/VDE 20A
32A
63A
100A
UL/CSA 16A
100A
30A
60A
IEC/EN/VDE 690V
690V
690V
1000V
UL/CSA 600V
600V
600V
600V
Main Switch
Isolation 750V
Voltage, Max.
750V
750V
1000V
AC-21A
20A
IEC/EN/VDE
32A
63A
100A
AC-1 SEV 20A
32A
63A
100A
3-phase
4 kW
220…240V
5.5 kW
15 kW
22 kW
3-pole
7.5 kW
380…440V
11 kW
22 kW
37 kW
500…690V 7.5 kW
11 kW
22 kW
37 kW
3-phase
3 kW
220…240V
4 kW
11 kW
22 kW
3-pole
5.5 kW
380…440V
7.5 kW
18.5 kW
30 kW
500…690V 5.5 kW
30 kW
Rated Operational
Power at 50/60
Hz (AC-23A
IEC/EN/VDE)
DOL Rating
(UL/CSA)
Rated Breaking
Capacity
4 x M20 (RKS only)
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Finger Protection
DIN 57106/VDE 0106 T.100
Environmental Characteristics
Logic
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+40 ° (14…104 °)
Relative Humidity
95%
10
11
16
12
Rated Operational
Power at 50/60
Hz (AC-3A
IEC/EN/VDE)
Safety Ratings
Category
100,000 operations
S3 Intermittent Rating Duty Factor
60/40/25% = 1, 3/1, 6/2 xlu
(VDE 0530, Part 1)
Description
Standards
Electrical Life
7.5 kW
18.5 kW
3-phase 140V 1 HP
2 HP
5 HP
10 HP
3-pole 240V 2 HP
5 HP
15 HP
25 HP
480V 5 HP
10 HP
30 HP
30 HP
600V 5 HP
10 HP
40 HP
30 HP
AC-23/AC-3
250A
220…240V
330A
500A
600A
Motor Switch
250A
380…440V
330A
500A
600A
300A
500…690V 150A
220A
270A
Fuse Rating (GI)
25 A,
max.
35 A,
max.
63/50 A, 100 A,
max.
max.
Rated Fuse Short Circuit Current
15 kA
15 kA
Terminal Cross Section
Physical Characteristics
1…10
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
2.5…3.5
mm2 single/multiple wire
0.75 …6
Shear Force to Key
15/20 kA 25 kA
4…16
2.5…10
1.5…2.5
(stranded) with sleeve
Conductor Size, mm2 min…max
8 AWG
6 AWG
2 AWG
The Prosafe Advantage
Power
Stainless steel
construction.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-108
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:48 AM
Page 3-109
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Enclosure Mounted (RKS only)
Mild Steel Enclosure Mounted (RKS only)
Panel Mounted
Contact Type
Current Accuracy
Cat. No.
4 N.O.
20 A
440T-MRKSE101
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20 A
440T-MRKSE111
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MRKSE121
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MRKSE131
3 N.O. & 1 N.O.
3 N.O. 100 A and 1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MRKSE141
8 N.O.
20 A
440T-MRKSE161
3 N.O. + Neutral
200 A
440T-MRKSE211
3 N.O.
400 A
440T-MRKSE221
4 N.O.
20 A
440T-MRPSE101
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20 A
440T-MRPSE111
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MRPSE121
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MRPSE131
3 N.O. & 1 N.O.
3 N.O. 100 A and 1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MRPSE141
8 N.O.
20 A
440T-MRPSE161
3 N.O. & 3 N.C.
20 A
440T-MRPSE181
4 N.O.
40 A
440T-MRPSE201
Principles
Type
General
Product Selection
Type
Number of Keys
Contact Type
Current Accuracy
Cat. No.
9-
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 3-107.
Quad key isolator
Dual key exchange
isolator
Triple key exchange
isolator
Quad key exchange
isolator
3 keys out
4 keys out
1 key in/ 1 key out
1 key in/ 2 key out
1 key in/ 3 key out
440T-MMRSE1011
20 A
440T-MMRSE1111
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MMRSE1211
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MMRSE1311
4 N.O.
20 A
440T-MMRSE20111
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20 A
440T-MMRSE21111
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MMRSE22111
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MMRSE23111
4 N.O.
20 A
440T-MMRSE301111
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20 A
440T-MMRSE311111
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MMRSE321111
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MMRSE331111
4 N.O.
20 A
440T-MMRXE101⊗
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20 A
440T-MMRXE111⊗
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MMRXE121⊗
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MMRXE131⊗
4 N.O.
20 A
440T-MMRXE201⊗⊗
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20 A
440T-MMRXE211⊗⊗
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MMRXE221⊗⊗
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MMRXE231⊗⊗
4 N.O.
20 A
440T-MMRXE301⊗⊗⊗
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
20 A
440T-MMRXE311⊗⊗⊗
4 N.O.
32 A
440T-MMRXE321⊗⊗⊗
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MMRXE331⊗⊗⊗
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 3-107.
Power
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See page 3-107.
11-Cat. No.
Index
Triple key isolator
2 keys out
20 A
Logic
Dual key isolator
4 N.O.
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Isolator on First Key Out
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-109
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-110
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Accessories
Description
Additional Information
Cat. No.
General
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
Stainless steel replacement code barrel for products other than 100 A
RPS/RKS units with dust cap
440T-ASCBE141
3-140
Stainless steel replacement code barrel for 100 A unit rotary switch
440T-ASCBE111
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
440T-ASFC101
Cable grip, M20 conduit, accommodates cable diameter 7…10.5 mm
(0.27…0.41 in.)
440A-A09028
3-53
440A-A09042
Adaptor, conduit, M20 to 1/2 inch NPT, plastic
Principles
Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 1 N.O. Late Make, Early Break 1
N.C. Auxiliary
For use with RPSE12, RPSE20 (maximum 1 per switch)
440T-AACA10
Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 2 N.O. Late Make, Early Break
For use with RPSE12, RPSE20 (maximum 1 per switch)
440T-AACA11
Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 1 N.O., 1 N.C.
For use with RPSE13 & 14
440T-AACA20
Supplemental Contact Block, 20 A, 2 N.O.
For use with RPSE13 & 14
440T-AACA21
ABS plastic enclosure
For use with dual key, and dual key exchange, isolators
440T-AIPB10
Stainless steel enclosure (240x180x150 mm)
For use with >20 A RPSE units (not including RPSE21 or 22)
440T-AIPB25
Stainless steel enclosure (150x150x80 mm)
For use with RPSE10 & 11
440T-AIPB26
ABS plastic enclosure
For use with triple/quad key, and triple/quad key exchange, isolators
440T-AIPB50
Stainless steel enclosure
For use with triple/quad key, and triple/quad key exchange, isolators
440T-AIPB55
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See page 3-107.
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
MRKSE12 and MRKSE13
100
(3.93)
85.7 (3.37)
Weather Cap
Cover
129.2 (4.99)
60 (2.36)
2 Off M4
Mounting
Holes
115 (4.52)
39 (1.53)
Cover Code
Barrel
4 FIXINGS
Ø4.5 (0.17)
24 (0.94)
Assembly
Adaptor
Plate
11-Cat. No.
Index
60 (2.36)
23 (0.9)
4 M20 KNOCKOUTS
(2 PER END)
2 Off
20 mm dia.
(0.78)
Knockouts
On Rear
Face
61 CRS
(2.4)
60 CRS
(2.35)
VIEW OF BASE FIXINGS
125 CRS (4.92)
Coded Key
80 (3.14)
‘A’
View On ‘A’
4 Off Ø20 mm (0.78)
Knockouts Typical Position
2 Off Top and 2 Off Bottom
MMRSE10
MMRSE20
100 (3.94)
130 (5.12) CRS
MOUNTING
HOLES
Ø4.2 (0.17)
1
3
5
7
130 (5.12) CRS
2
4
6
8
Logic
ISOLATOR
4 N.O. 20 A
KEY FREE
70 (2.76)
CRS
144 (5.67)
PANEL
CUT-OUT
168 158
(6.61) (6.22)
CRS
150
(5.91)
70 (2.76)
CRS
246 (9.69) PANEL CUT-OUT
270 (10.63)
90 (3.54) CRS
69 (2.72)
89 (3.5)
Power
35 (1.38)
CRS
R4
max.
PANEL
CUTOUT
82
(3.23)
SIX HOLES
Ø4.5 (0.18)
SIX MOUNTING
HOLES
Ø4.5 (0.18)
KEYS SUPPLIED SEPERATELY
90 (3.54) CRS
35 (1.38)
CRS
165 (6.49)
Mounting Centers
3-Trapped Key
Switches
175 (6.88)
MRKSE10 and MRKSE11
46 (1.81)
80 (3.14)
88.4 (3.48)
9-
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
69
(2.72)
ISOLATOR 4 N.O. 20 A
CONTACTS (KEY FREE)
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
97
(3.82)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-110
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-111
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
MRKSE16
Weather Cap
Assembly
OFF
General
MRKSE14
2 Off M4
Mounting Holes
External
80
(3.15)
60 crs
160 (6.3)
Coded Key
Unit in Off Position
Key Removed
View on ‘A’
163
(6.42)
Code Barrel
Assembly
M25/M32
Conduit Entry
Knockouts
2 per end
100 (3.98)
4 Off M4
Mounting
Holes
Internal
85
(3.35)
Adaptor Plate
Principles
‘A’
60 crs
100
(3.98)
90 crs
ON
18 (0.71)
100
(3.98)
MRPSE10 and 11
64 (2.51)
9-
240
(9.4)
Code Barrel
Assembly
70.4 (2.77)
16 (0.62)
64 (2.51)
44.4 (1.74) Dia.
58 (2.28) Dia.
Base Mountings
M4 Fixings
96 (3.78)
110.5 (4.35)
Unit in On Position
Key Trapped
MRPSE 12, 13, 14 and 20
Panel Mounting
Details
2 Holes
±4.0
(0.15) Dia.
±23
(0.9)
25
(0.98)
Weather Cap
Assembly
Fixing Screws
Legend Plate
2 Holes
4.0 (0.15) Dia. 20.0 (0.78) Dia.
Mounting Screws
Mtg. Block
16.0 (0.62)
Hole
20 (0.79)
3 (0.12) max. Panel Thickness
16
(0.6)
Switch Unit
Code Barrel
16
(0.6)
34 (1.33)
3 mm max.
Panel Thickness
Mounting Block
32.0 (1.25)
32 (1.26)
Panel Mounting
Details
71.5 (2.8)
55.5 (2.19)
Switch Unit
OFF
3-Trapped Key
Switches
250
(9.8)
4 Off 20 (0.79) Dia. Knockouts Typical
Position 2 Off Top & 2 Off Bottom
11-Cat. No.
Index
44 crs
25
(0.98)
43
(1.69)
ON
64 Square
Legend Plate
Drive Adaptor
Logic
Legend
Plate
Power
Panel
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-111
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-112
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
MMRXE10 and MMRXE11
General
100 (3.94)
MOUNTING
HOLES
Ø4.2 (0.17)
ISOLATOR
MRXE10 - 4 N.O. 20 A
MRXE11 - 2 N.O./2 N.C. 20 A
70
(2.76)
A
PRIMARY
Principles
150
(5.91)
SECONDARY
B
70
(2.76)
MADE IN GBR
87 (3.43)
90 (3.54)
MMRXE30
MRKSE22
9-
270 (10.63)
130 (5.12)
95 (3.74)
130 (5.12)
450 (17.72)
280 (11.02)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
168 158
(6.61) (6.22)
63
(2.48)
600
(23.62)
56 56
(2.2)
SIX MOUNTING
HOLES Ø4.5 (0.18)
56 (2.2)
56 (2.2)
SECONDARY SECONDARY SECONDARY
KEY #1
KEY #2
KEY #3
PAINTED
STEEL
CABINET
PRIMARY
KEY
ISOLATOR HANDLE
11-Cat. No.
Index
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
SINGLE KEY
BOLTLOCK
ISOLATOR ON FIRST
SECONDARY KEY
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-112
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-113
Safety Switches
Rotary Switches
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
MRPSE16
16
(0.6)
2 Holes
±4.0 (0.15) Dia.
Hole
20 (0.79)
46 (1.8) Dia.
Code Barrel
±23
(0.9)
Principles
16
(0.6)
General
3 (0.12) max. Panel Thickness
32 (1.26)
Panel Mounting Details
Switch Unit
25
(0.98)
Weather Cap
Assembly
Mounting. Block
Fixing Screws
OFF
9-
ON
Drive Adaptor
Legend
Plate
Panel
2
1
2
1
2 (100A)
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4 (100A)
3
4
5
6
5
6
5
6 (100A)
5
6
7
8
7
8
7
8 (20A)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MRKSE11 and MRPSE11
MMRSE11 and MMRXE11
MMRSE21 and MMRXE21
MMRSE31 and MMRXE31
MRKSE14 and MRPSE14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
MRKSE16 and MRPSE16
Logic
MRKSE10 and MRPSE10
MRKSE12 and MRPSE12
MRKSE13 and MRPSE13
----------- and MRPSE20
MMRSE10 and MMRXE10
MMRSE12 and MMRXE12
MMRSE13 and MMRXE13
MMRSE20 and MMRXE20
MMRSE22 and MMRXE22
MMRSE23 and MMRXE23
MMRSE30 and MMRXE30
MMRSE32 and MMRXE32
MMRSE33 and MMRXE33
11-Cat. No.
Index
1
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Typical Wiring
Diagrams Shown with Key Free
Power
MRKSE18 and MRPSE18
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-113
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-114
Safety Switches
Solenoid Release Units
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN1954-1, IEC/EN60204-1,EN1088,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO13849-1,
ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19,
AS4024.1
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and BG
Operating Characteristics
Principles
Solenoid Voltage
24V DC, 110V AC, 230V AC
Solenoid Power
DC Types: 6.5 W continuous
AC Types: 6V A continuous
Electrical Life
100,000 operations
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Utilization Category
9-
Description
Electrical Characteristics
The solenoid release unit is used for electrical isolation of machinery
to improve safe access. It consists of a rotary power switch and a
solenoid. The trapped key can be removed once an external signal
is given to its internal solenoid locking mechanism. An indicator light
on the solenoid release unit indicates when the trapped key can be
removed; that is, when power is applied to the solenoid. The
solenoid signal only needs to be present when key removal is
necessary. The solenoid is rated for 100% duty cycle. Power to the
solenoid can be removed after the trapped key is removed.
Environmental & Physical Characteristics
Rotating the trapped key causes the isolating power switch to
change state; the normally open contacts open and the normally
closed contacts (if applicable) will close.
See rotary power switches.
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Material
Trapped Key Components: 316L
stainless steel
Steel Face Plate: 316L stainless steel
Optional Box: ABS plastic
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
0…40 ° (32…104 °)
Relative Humidity
95%
The trapped key can then be used in the next sequence of the
operation.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Features
11-Cat. No.
Index
Direct drive operation—positively opens contacts
Integral solenoid monitoring
Key trapped until release signal is applied
LED or NEON "key free" indication
316L stainless steel construction
24V DC, 110V AC or 230V AC solenoid options
Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
UL and CSA Approval on switches
Single or multiple key units available (contact factory)
Replaceable code barrel assembly
Logic
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel
construction.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-114
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-115
Safety Switches
Solenoid Release Units
Product Selection
20 A
4 N.O.
3 N.O. & 3 N.C.
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
440T-MSRUE131
440T-MSRUE231
20 A
440T-MSRUE141
4 N.O.
63 A
440T-MSRUE241
230V AC
20 A
4 N.O.
110V DC
440T-MSRUE341
63 A
440T-MSRUE351
20 A
440T-MSRUE461
4 N.O.
440T-MS2097D11
20 A
32 A
63 A
4 N.O.
20 A
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
32 A
4 N.O.
63 A
4 N.O.
Quad key out
20 A
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
24V DC
440T-MSRUE401
3 N.O. & 3 N.C.
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
24V DC
440T-MSRUE301
440T-MSRUE441
4 N.O.
4 N.O.
Triple key out
440T-MSRUE331
32 A
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
24V DC
440T-MSRUE201
3 N.O. & 3 N.C.
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
Dual key out
440T-MSRUE221
32 A
110V AC
Single key out
440T-MSRUE121
20 A
20 A
4 N.O.
440T-MSRUE101
32 A
4 N.O.
440T-MS2097A11
440T-MS2097G11
440T-MS2097J11
440T-MS3417D111
440T-MS3417A111
440T-MS3417G111
440T-MS3417J111
440T-MS3418D1111
440T-MS3418A1111
32 A
440T-MS3418G1111
63 A
440T-MS3418J1111
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107.
Accessories
Description
Additional Information
General
24V DC
Cat. No.
440T-MSRUE111
Principles
Current, Nom
9-
Contacts
2 N.O. & 2 N.C.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Solenoid Voltage
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
3-140
440T-ASCBE141
440T-ASFC101
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
For use with single key out 20 A units
440T-AIPB10
For use with single key out 32 A units
440T-AIPB22
Optional ABS plastic enclosure
For use with triple/quad key out units
440T-AIPB50
Optional stainless steel enclosure
For use with triple/quad key out units
440T-AIPB55
Optional plastic enclosure
11-Cat. No.
Index
Type
Power
Logic
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-115
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-116
Safety Switches
Solenoid Release Units
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
MS2097
MSRUE13
100 (3.94)
90 (3.54)
270 (10.63)
130 (5.12)
70
(2.76)
130 (5.12)
158
(6.22)
144 (5.67)
CUTOUT
168
(6.61)
24V DC
SOLENOID
(11 W)
Principles
150
(5.91)
63
(2.5)
246 (9.69) CUTOUT
70
(2.76)
KEY#1
ISOLATOR CONTACTS
3 N.O./3 N.C. 20 A (KEY FREE)
90 (3.54)
CRS
35
(1.38)
CRS
R4
max.
9-
1
3
5
7
9
11
SIX HOLES
Ø4.5 (0.18)
82
(3.23)
SOLENOID MONITOR
SWITCHES (KEY TRAPPED)
SOLENOID
2
SOLENOID
24V DC SOLENOID
LOCKING KEY #1
ISOLATOR
4 N.O. 20 A
24V DC
INPUT
MSRUE35
2
7
8
24V DC
INPUT
4
6
270 (10.63)
130 (5.12)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
70
(2.76)
230V AC
SOLENOID
130 (5.12)
158
(6.22)
168
(6.61)
230V AC
SOLENOID
(17VA)
150
(5.91)
ISOLATOR AND SOLENOID
ON FIRST KEY
70
(2.76)
11-Cat. No.
Index
92 (3.62)
90 (3.54)
CRS
ISOLATOR CONTACTS
4 N.O. 63 A (KEY FREE)
1
2
4
3
66
(2.6)
82
(3.23)
4 N.O. 32 A
ISOLATOR
6 HOLES
Ø4.2 (0.17)
R4
max.
35
35
(1.38)
CRS
CRS
1
3
5
MS3417
100 (3.94)
90 (3.54)
35
(1.38)
CRS
SOLENOID MONITOR
SWITCHES (KEY TRAPPED)
95
(3.74)
4
6
8
10
12
PANEL
CUTOUT
66
(2.6)
35
(1.38)
CRS
69
(2.72)
6 HOLES
Ø4.2 (0.17)
97 (3.82)
KEY#2
PANEL
CUTOUT
6
5
7
SIX HOLES
Ø4.5 (0.18)
230V AC
INPUT
8
SOLENOID
SOLENOID MONITOR
SWITCHES (KEY TRAPPED)
+
Logic
Typical Wiring
MC MC
Gnd
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-116
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-117
Safety Switches
Electronic Timed-Delay Units
Specifications
IEC/EN60204-1,EN1088, IEC/EN609475-1, ISO13849-1, ISO12100-1&2,
ISO14119, GS-ET-19, AS4024.1
Standards
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and BG
General
Safety Ratings
Electrical Life
100,000 operations
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Solenoid Voltage
24V DC, 110V AC, and 230V AC
Time Delay
0.1 s…30 min
Environmental & Physical Characteristics
Description
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
0…40 ° (32…104 °)
The Electronic Timed-delay Unit (ETU) is used in applications that
require an elapsed time to occur before allowing access to a
hazardous area. The ETU uses an CU1 control unit timer to execute
the timing sequence. Turning a nonremovable key initiates the timer.
When the CU1 times out, its output energizes an internal solenoid,
which then allows the removal of either one or two trapped keys.
Relative Humidity
95%
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Material
Trapped key components: 316L stainless
steel
Face plate: 316L stainless steel
Optional box: ABS plastic or stainless
steel
9-
The Single-key Timed delay Unit (STU) has one trapped key. After
the CU1 preset time has expired, the single trapped key can be
removed and used to continue the next sequence in allowing
access to the hazard. The single key must be returned to the STU
and trapped to allow the nonremovable key to re-initiate the hazard.
Principles
Operating Characteristics
3-Trapped Key
Switches
The Dual-key Timed delay Unit (DTU) has two trapped keys. After
the CU1 preset time has expired, both keys can be removed and
used to continue the next sequences in allowing access to the
hazard. Both keys must be returned to the DTU and trapped to
allow the nonremovable key re-initiate the hazard.
Features
Logic
11-Cat. No.
Index
Timed-delay output up to 40 minutes
Single key or dual key
316L stainless steel keys
Category 1 Stop
Replaceable code barrel assembly
The Prosafe Advantage
Power
Stainless steel
construction.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-117
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-118
Safety Switches
Electronic Timed-Delay Units
Product Selection
Type
Solenoid Voltage
General
24V DC
Single key out
Panel mounted
110V AC
230V AC
24V DC
Principles
Dual key out
Panel mounted
110V AC
230V AC
Contact Set 1
Contact Set 2
Cat. No.
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MSTUE101
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MSTUE111
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MSTUE201
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MSTUE221
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MSTUE301
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MSTUE331
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MDTUE1011
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MDTUE1111
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MDTUE2011
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MDTUE2211
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MDTUE3011
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MDTUE3311
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Accessories
Description
Additional Information
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
440T-ASCBE141
3-140
440T-ASFC101
9-
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
Optional plastic enclosure
Optional stainless steel enclosure
For use with 20 A units
440T-AIPB20
For use with 40 A units
440T-AIPB23
For use with all units
440T-AIPB46
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
250 (9.84)
226 (8.90)
90 (3.54)
216 (8.50)
118 (4.65)
Optional ABS Box
(440T-AIPB20) for
20 Amp Isolator
11-Cat. No.
Index
160 (6.30)
150 (5.91)
70 (2.76)
70 (2.76)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
One Key for STU
(key not included)
Nonremovable Key
Two Keys for DTU
(keys not included)
98 (3.86)
95 (3.74)
300 (11.81)
110 (4.33)
8 Holes 4.6
(0.18) Dia.
230 (9.06)
Logic
Optional ABS Box
(440T-AIPB23) for
40 Amp Isolator
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-118
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-119
Safety Switches
Stopped Motion Units
Specifications
EN1954-1, IEC/EN60204-1, EN1088,
IEC/EN60947-5-1, ISO13849-1,
ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, GS-ET-19,
AS4024.1
Standards
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and BG
General
Safety Ratings
The CU2 requires a PNP and an NPN output type proximity sensors.
When the proximity sensors stop detecting movement, the CU2
activates its output, powering an internal solenoid. With the solenoid
energized, one or two trapped keys can be removed from the SMU.
The removable trapped keys (one or two) can be used to continue
the next sequence in allowing access to the hazardous area.
Electrical Life
100,000 operations
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Solenoid Voltage
24V DC, 110V AC, and 230V AC
Time Delay
0.1 s…40 min
Zero Speed Sensors
2x inductive sensors
Environmental & Physical Characteristics
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
0…40° (32…104°)
Relative Humidity
95%
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs)
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in)
Material
Trapped key components: 316L stainless
steel
Face plate: 316L stainless steel
Optional box: ABS plastic or stainless
steel
Inductive sensors: stainless steel barrel,
plastic face
Mounting
Tamper resistant screws
Weight
2.0 kg (4.4 lbs)
See the CU2 control unit for details on setting the delay time.
Additional proximity sensors can be found in the Sensors catalog.
Logic
11-Cat. No.
Index
Stopped motion detection
NPN and PNP proximity sensors
Timed-delay output up to 40 minutes
Category 1 Stop
Replaceable code barrel assembly
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Features
9-
The Stopped Motion Unit (SMU) is used in applications that require
the detection of stopped motion of mechanical parts of a machine.
The SMU uses inductive proximity sensors to detect motion and the
CU2 control unit to monitor the sensors.
Principles
Operating Characteristics
Description
Power
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel
construction.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-119
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-120
Safety Switches
Stopped Motion Units
Product Selection
Type
Solenoid Voltage
General
24V DC
Single key out
Panel mounted
110V AC
230V AC
24V DC
Principles
Dual key out
Panel mounted
110V AC
230V AC
Contact Set 1
Contact Set 2
Cat. No.
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MSMSE101
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MSMSE111
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MSMSE201
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MSMSE221
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MSMSE301
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MSMSE331
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MDMSE1011
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MDMSE1111
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MDMSE2011
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MDMSE2211
3 N.O. 40 A
1 N.O. 20 A
440T-MDMSE3011
2 N.O. 20 A
1 N.C. 20 A
440T-MDMSE3311
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Accessories
Description
Size [mm]
Type
Additional Information
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
Stainless steel replacement code
barrel with dust cap
—
3-140
9-
Stainless steel weatherproof
replacement dust cap
440T-ASCBE141
440T-ASFC101
—
500 mA fuse—Bussmann Cat.
No. ETF-500 mA
Optional plastic enclosure
500 mA @ 250V
NA
440R-A31562
For use with 20 A units
440T-AIPB20
—
For use with 40 A units
440T-AIPB23
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Optional stainless steel enclosure
For use with all units
12
Inductive Proximity Sensor,
Three-wire, DC
18
PNP
872C-D3NP12-E2
NPN
872C-D5NN18-E2
page 5-57
PNP
30
440T-AIPB46
872C-D3NN12-E2
NPN
872C-D5NP18-E2
NPN
872C-D10NN30-E2
PNP
872C-D10NP30-E2
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
250 (9.84)
226 (8.90)
90 (3.54)
216 (8.50)
118 (4.65)
Optional ABS Box
(440T-AIPB20) for
20 Amp Isolator
Logic
160 (6.30)
150 (5.91)
70 (2.76)
70 (2.76)
11-Cat. No.
Index
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
One Key for STU
(key not included)
Nonremovable Key
Two Keys for DTU
(keys not included)
98 (3.86)
95 (3.74)
300 (11.81)
110 (4.33)
Power
230 (9.06)
8 Holes 4.6
(0.18) Dia.
Optional ABS Box
(440T-AIPB23) for
40 Amp Isolator
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-120
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-121
Safety Switches
Exchange Units
Specifications
Standards
EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119,
AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 3 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
cULus and TÜV
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and BG; C-Tick not required
General
Safety Ratings
Operating Characteristics
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-40…+200 ° (-40…+392 °)
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Description
Relative Humidity
95%
The key exchange unit (KEX) is used in an interlocking sequence to
link together other devices in the Prosafe range and caters to more
complex operating sequences.
Material
316L stainless steel
A typical process may require a rotary key switch to turn a motor
off. The key from the rotary switch is removed and inserted into a
KEX. The KEX then releases three keys which would allow
simultaneous access to the hazard area through three different
gates. This KEX is described as 1 key in 3 keys out. The keys in are
considered primary codes, so the keys are not included in the KEX.
The keys out are considered secondary codes, so the keys are
included.
Number of Keys
Length
[mm (in.)]
Width
[mm (in.)]
Depth
[mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
Painted Mild Steel
7…11 way (max)
400 (15.7)
300 (11.8)
200 (7.87)
440T-AIPB30
12…15 way (max)
400 (15.7)
400 (15.7)
210 (8.26)
440T-AIPB33
16…25 way (max)
600 (23.6)
600 (23.6)
210 (8.26)
440T-AIPB34
12…15 way (max)
400 (15.7)
400 (15.7)
210 (8.26)
440T-AIPB40
16…25 way (max)
600 (23.6)
600 (23.6)
210 (8.26)
440T-AIPB44
9-
It is typically used in applications where there is more than one
access way to the hazardous area, and each access way must be
open at the same time. The key exchange unit accomplishes this by
allowing one or more keys to be inserted which then releases
multiple keys out.
Optional Key Exchange Cabinets
Stainless Steel
3-Trapped Key
Switches
The operating principle is such that no secondary keys can be
removed from the unit until all primary keys have been inserted,
rotated, and trapped. The primary keys remain trapped until all
secondary keys have been re-inserted, rotated, and trapped.
Principles
Environmental & Physical Characteristics
Features
Logic
11-Cat. No.
Index
A range of off-the-shelf units in various combinations
316L stainless steel construction
Primary key(s) in release secondary keys simultaneously on units
up to six ways
Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
Replaceable code barrel assembly
The Prosafe Advantage
Power
Stainless steel
construction.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-121
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-122
Safety Switches
Exchange Units
Product Selection
Key Exchange Units
General
Principles
9-
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Number of Keys
Keys In and Out
Cat. No.
2 way
1 key in 1 key out
440T-MKEXE10‡
3 way
1 key in 2 keys out
440T-MKEXE11‡
4 way
1 key in 3 keys out
440T-MKEXE12‡
5 way
1 key in 4 keys out
440T-MKEXE13‡
6 way
1 key in 5 keys out
440T-MKEXE14‡
4 way
2 key in 2 keys out
440T-MKEXE15‡
5 way
2 key in 3 keys out
440T-MKEXE16‡
6 way
2 key in 4 keys out
440T-MKEXE17‡
6 way
3 key in 3 keys out
440T-MKEXE18‡
7 way
1 key in 6 keys out
440T-MKEXE19‡
8 way
1 key in 7 keys out
440T-MKEXE20‡
9 way
1 key in 8 keys out
440T-MKEXE22‡
10 way
1 key in 9 keys out
440T-MKEXE23‡
11 way
1 key in 10 keys out
440T-MKEXE24‡
12 way
1 key in 11 keys out
440T-MKEXE25‡
13 way
1 key in 12 keys out
440T-MKEXE26‡
14 way
1 key in 13 keys out
440T-MKEXE27‡
15 way
1 key in 14 keys out
440T-MKEXE28‡
16 way
1 key in 15 keys out
440T-MKEXE29‡
17 way
1 key in 16 keys out
440T-MKEXE30‡
18 way
1 key in 17 keys out
440T-MKEXE33‡
19 way
1 key in 18 keys out
440T-MKEXE34‡
20 way
1 key in 19 keys out
440T-MKEXE35‡
21 way
1 key in 20 keys out
440T-MKEXE36‡
22 way
1 key in 21 keys out
440T-MKEXE37‡
23 way
1 key in 22 keys out
440T-MKEXE38‡
24 way
1 key in 23 keys out
440T-MKEXE39‡
25 way
1 key in 24 keys out
440T-MKEXE40‡
‡ Specify the codes individually for each primary key in (key not included) and for each secondary key (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Consult factory for other configurations of keys in and keys out.
Accessories
Description
Additional Information
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
11-Cat. No.
Index
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
440T-ASCBE141
3-140
440T-ASFC101
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
Mild steel cabinet for 7-…11-way units
440T-AIPB30
Mild steel cabinet for 12-…15-way units
440T-AIPB33
Mild steel cabinet for 16-…25-way units
440T-AIPB34
Stainless steel cabinet for 12-…15-way units
440T-AIPB40
Stainless steel cabinet for 16-…25-way units
440T-AIPB44
Optional Key Exchange Cabinet
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
(4, 5 or) 6 Way Key Exchange Unit
200 (7.87)
169 ( 6.65)
(2) 3 Way Key Exchange Unit
4 Fixing Holes
8.6 (0.33) Dia.
Power
27.5
(1.08)
185 ( 7.28)
87 (3.43)
185 ( 7.28)
4 Fixing Holes
8.6 (0.33) Dia.
56
(2.20)
87 (3.43)
55.5
(2.18)
27.5
(1.08)
Key Exchange Cabinets
(painted mild steel or stainless steel)
111 (4.37)
200 (7.87)
169 ( 6.65)
L
Logic
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
W
D
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-122
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-123
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Specifications
Standards
EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119,
AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and BG; C-Tick not required
General
Safety Ratings
Operating Characteristics
Mechanical: -40…+200 ° (-40…+392°)
Electrical: -20…+80 ° (-4…+176 °)
Solenoid: -20…+60 ° (-4…+140°)
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Principles
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
Environmental & Physical Characteristics
The bolt interlocks are designed to allow access to hazardous areas
when an appropriate key is inserted into the interlock. These bolt
interlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide a
rugged, industrial grade method of helping prevent access through
gates.
One advantage of the bolt interlocks is that there is no need to run
power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key
rotary switch on a control panel and the key is then hand-carried to
the gate by the operator.
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Relative Humidity
95%
Weight [kg (lbs)]
SBL: 0.60 (1.32)
DBL: 1.10 (2.43)
Material
316L stainless steel
Mounting
SBL: 2 x M5 counterbored from top or
2 x M5 from underside with M5 nuts
DBL: 4 x M5 counterbored from top or
4 x M5 from underside with M5 nuts
Bolt Diameter
15 mm (0.59 in.)
9-
Description
3-Trapped Key
Switches
The Single Bolt interlock (SBL) is designed to be used to access
hazardous areas where partial body exposure is required. The SBL
is not shipped with a key. If two keys are needed for partial body
access, select the Dual Bolt interlock (DBL) that requires both keys
to be trapped to operate. This version of the DBL does not include
the keys.
When whole body access is needed, the DBL, with one primary key
and one secondary trapped key (included) should be used. The
secondary key serves the function of a personnel key. This DBL
allows the operator to carry the personnel key into the hazardous
area. When the operator returns from the hazardous area and
returns the personnel key to the DBL, the locking sequence can be
reversed and the process re-started.
Features
11-Cat. No.
Index
316L stainless steel construction
Various extensions of bolt
Direct drive push/pull operation
Replaceable code barrel assembly
Fitted with tamper resistant screws
Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
Solenoid and electric versions
Multiple key options
Logic
The Prosafe Advantage
Power
Stainless steel
construction.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-123
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-124
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Product Selection - Mechanical
Type
Trapped Key Condition
General
Single key
Bolt Retracted [mm (in.)]
Bolt Extended [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MSBLE101
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MSBLE111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MSBLE121
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MSBLE131
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MDBLE1011
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBLE1111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBLE1211
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MDBLE1311
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MDBLE141⊗
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBLE151⊗
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBLE161⊗
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MDBLE171⊗
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MDBLJ141⊗
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBLJ151⊗
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBLJ161⊗
13 (0.51)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBLJ171⊗
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MTBLE10111
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBLE11111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MTBLE12111
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MTBLE13111
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MTBLE1411⊗
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MTBLE1511⊗
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MTBLE1611⊗
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MTBLE1711⊗
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MTBLE181⊗⊗
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MTBLE191⊗⊗
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MTBLE201⊗⊗
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MTBLE211⊗⊗
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MQBLE101111
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MQBLE111111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MQBLE121111
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MQBLE131111
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MQBLE14111⊗
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MQBLE15111⊗
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MQBLE16111⊗
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MQBLE17111⊗
Key trapped to retract bolt
Both keys trapped to retract bolt
Dual key
Principles
Primary key trapped, secondary
key free to retract bolt
Dual Key with Secondary Ejector
Key
Three keys trapped to retract bolt
9Triple key
Two primary trapped, one
secondary key free to retract bolt
3-Trapped Key
Switches
One primary trapped, two
secondary keys free to retract
bolt
Four keys trapped to retract bolt
Quad key
11-Cat. No.
Index
Three primary trapped, one
secondary key free to retract bolt
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Product Selection - Electrical
Contact Type
Type
Trapped Key Condition
Free key to retract bolt
Logic
Single key
Key trapped to retract bolt
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
break before make
Both keys trapped to
retract bolt
Dual key
Power
Primary key trapped,
secondary key free to
retract bolt
Bolt Retracted [mm (in.)]
Bolt Extended [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MSBSE101
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MSBSE111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MSBSE121
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MSBSE131
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MSBSE331
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MSBSE341
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MSBSE351
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MSBSE361
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MDBSE1011
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBSE1111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBSE1211
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MDBSE1311
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MDBSE141⊗
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBSE151⊗
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBSE161⊗
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MDBSE171⊗
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-124
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-125
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Contact Type
Trapped Key
Condition
Type
Bolt Retracted
[mm (in.)]
Bolt Extended
[mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MSBUE101
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MSBUE111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MSBUE121
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MSBUE131
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MSBUE331
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MSBUE341
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MSBUE351
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MSBUE361
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MDBUE1011
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBUE1111
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBUE1211
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MDBUE1311
0
14 (0.55)
440T-MDBUE141⊗
3 (0.11)
17 (0.66)
440T-MDBUE151⊗
6 (0.23)
20 (0.78)
440T-MDBUE161⊗
13 (0.51)
27 (1.06)
440T-MDBUE171⊗
Free key to retract
bolt
Single key
Key trapped to retract
bolt
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
break before make
24V DC
Both keys trapped to
retract bolt
Dual key
Primary key trapped,
secondary key free to
retract bolt
Principles
Solenoid Voltage
General
Product Selection - Solenoid
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
9-
Accessories
Description
Additional Information
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
440T-ASCBE141
3-140
440T-ASFC101
440T-AKEYE131
Stainless steel ejector key
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
MDBLE10, 11, 12, and 13
30 (1.18)
44.3
Ø19.8
(1.74) & 28.5 (1.12) (0.78)
PITCHES
Ø14.6
(0.57)
M5 C'BORES
15.8
(0.62)
3.5 (0.14)
57.7 (2.27)
44.3 28.5 (1.12) Ø20
(1.74) & 30 (1.18) (0.79)
PITCHES
48.5
(1.91)
48.5
(1.91)
5.8
(0.23)
15.8
(0.62)
3.5 (0.14)
30.5 (1.2)
3.5 (0.14)
57.7 (2.27)
36.3 (1.43)
Ø22.8
(0.9)
KEY #1
KEY #2
WEATHER CAP
M5 LOCKING
SCREW
3 PADS FOR
UNDER PANEL
MOUNTING
Ø25.4 (1)
12
(0.47)
3.9
(0.15)
92
(3.62)
55
(2.17)
124 (4.88)
Type
30 (1.18)
CRS
FRONT FIXING POINTS
TAPPED M5
59.7 (2.35)
65.5 (2.58)
30
(1.18)
30 (1.18)
FRONT FIXINGS
TAPPED M5
30
(1.18)
12 (0.47)
Ø25.3 (1)
Ø14.6
(0.57)
Logic
FIXING HOLES
M5 CLEARANCE, C’BORED
X BOLT PROJECTION
14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
X [mm (in.)]
440T-MDBLE10
0 (0)
440T-MDBLE11
3 (0.12)
440T-MDBLE12
6 (0.24)
440T-MDBLE13
13 (0.51)
Power
MSBLE10, 11, 12, and 13
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
11-Cat. No.
Index
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
3-125
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-126
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
MDBLE14, 15, 16, and 17
MTBLE10, 11, 12, and 13
M5 C'BORES
15.8
(0.62)
57.7 (2.27)
28.5 (1.12)
Principles
3.5 (0.14)
30.5 (1.2)
181 (7.13)
57.7 (2.27)
28.5 (1.12)
& 30 (1.18)
CRS
48.5
(1.91)
44.3 & 30 (1.18) Ø20
(1.74) PITCHES (0.79)
5.8 (0.23)
57.7 (2.27)
15.8
(0.62)
48.5
(1.91)
3.5 (0.14)
M5 CLEARANCE
X mm RETRACTED
14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
57.7 (2.27)
Ø25.3 (1)
Ø22.8
(0.9)
PRIMARY #3
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
12
(0.47)
30
(1.18)
124 (4.88)
30
(1.18)
5.8
(0.23)
9-
X BOLT PROJECTION
14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
Ø14.6
(0.57)
Type
X [mm (in.)]
440T-MTBLE10
0 (0)
X [mm (in.)]
440T-MTBLE11
3 (0.12)
440T-MDBLE14
0 (0)
440T-MTBLE12
6 (0.24)
440T-MDBLE15
3 (0.12)
440T-MTBLE13
13 (0.51)
Type
3-Trapped Key
Switches
440T-MDBLE16
6 (0.24)
440T-MDBLE17
13 (0.51)
MQBLE10, 11, 12, and 13
MSBSE10, 11, 12, and 13
15 (0.59)
239 (9.41)
15.8
(0.62)
57.7 (2.27)
PRIMARY #1
12 (0.47)
30 (1.18)
FRONT FIXINGS
TAPPED M5
PRIMARY #2
Ø14.6
(0.57)
57.7 (2.27)
57.7 (2.27)
M5 C'BORES
15.8
(0.62)
73.8 (2.91)
4 (0.16)
11-Cat. No.
Index
Ø14.6
(0.57)
28.5 (1.12)
& 30 (1.18)
CRS
48.5
(1.91)
M5 CLEARANCE
8
(0.31)
28.5 (1.12)
& 30 (1.18) Ø19.8
PITCHES (0.78)
M5 CLEARANCE
58
40
(1.57) (2.28)
5.8
(0.23)
X mm RETRACTED
14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
X mm RETRACTED
14 mm (0.55 in.) THROW
30.5 (1.2)
59.7 (2.35)
145 (5.71)
SECONDARY
SAFETY CONTACTS
PRIMARY #4
PRIMARY #3
PRIMARY #2
PRIMARY #1
Ø14.6
(0.57)
Logic
29.5
(1.16)
12 (0.47)
SWITCH LID
5.8 (0.23)
Type
X [mm (in.)]
Power
440T-MQBLE10
0 (0)
Type
440T-MQBLE11
3 (0.12)
440T-MSBSE10
0 (0)
440T-MQBLE12
6 (0.24)
440T-MSBSE11
3 (0.12)
440T-MQBLE13
13 (0.51)
440T-MSBSE12
6 (0.24)
440T-MSBSE13
13 (0.51)
X [mm (in.)]
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-126
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-127
Safety Switches
Bolt Interlocks
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
MDBSE10, 11, 12, and 13
MSBUE33, 34, 35, and 36
3.5 (0.14) TYP.
28.5 (1.12)
& 30 (1.18)
PITCHES
SAFETY
CONTACTS
AUXILIARY
CONTACTS
6 X M5
40
58
(1.57) (2.28)
Ø14.6
(0.57)
X mm EXTENDED
14 mm (0.55 in.) RETRACTED
44.3
(1.74)
M5 SLOTS
3.5 (0.14)
TYP.
40
59
(1.57) (2.32)
Ø14.6
(0.57)
57.7 (2.27)
30.5 (1.2)
73.6 (2.9)
57.7 (2.27)
30.5 (1.2)
PRIMARY
KEY
SECONDARY
KEY
KEY SUPPLIED SEPERATELY
SPARTAN SWITCH MODULE
24V DC SOLENOID
M20 CONDUIT
ENTRIES
TROJAN 5
SWITCH MODULE
M20 CONDUIT
ENTRY
25.4 (1)
12 (0.47)
12 (0.47)
202.4 (7.97)
5.8 (0.23)
X mm EXTENDED
Y mm RETRACTED
9-
5.8 (0.23)
Type
8 (0.31)
73.6 (2.9)
15.8 (0.62)
Principles
8 (0.31)
15.8 (0.62)
30
(1.18) 25.4 (1)
28.5 (1.12)
& 30 (1.18)
PITCHES
176 (6.93)
X [mm (in.)]
440T-MDBSE10
0 (0)
Type
X [mm (in.)]
440T-MDBSE11
3 (0.12)
440T-MSBUE33
14 (0.55)
0 (0)
440T-MDBSE12
6 (0.24)
440T-MSBUE34
17 (0.67)
3 (0.12)
440T-MDBSE13
13 (0.51)
440T-MSBUE35
20 (0.79)
6 (0.24)
440T-MSBUE36
27 (1.06)
13 (0.51)
Y [mm (in.)]
3-Trapped Key
Switches
44.3
(1.74)
General
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
MDBUE14, 15, 16, and 17
28.5 (1.12)
& 30 (1.18)
PITCHES
6 x M5
57.7 (2.27)
15.8 (0.62)
30.5 (1.2)
73.6 (2.9)
11-Cat. No.
Index
58
40
(1.57) (2.28)
Ø14.6
(0.57)
8
(0.31)
57.7 (2.27)
SECONDARY
KEY
PRIMARY
KEY
SPARTAN
SWITCH MODULE
24V DC SOLENOID
M20
CONDUIT
ENTRY
25.4 (1)
12 (0.47)
Logic
44.3
(1.74)
3.5 (0.14) TYP.
5.8 (0.23)
14 mm (0.55 in.) EXTENDED
0 mm (0 in.) RETRACTED
Power
233 (9.17)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-127
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-128
Safety Switches
Access/Chain Interlocks
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119,
AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and BG; C-Tick not required
Operating Characteristics
Principles
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
Mechanical: -40…+200 ° (-40…+392 °)
Electrical: -20…+80 ° (-4…+176 °)
Solenoid: -20…+60 ° (-4…+140°)
Relative Humidity
95%
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Physical Characteristics
Description
The access interlocks are designed to allow access to hazardous
areas when an appropriate key is inserted into the interlock. These
access interlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to
provide rugged, industrial grade method of helping prevent access
through gates. They are actuated by either a lever or a rod which is
connected to chain.
9-
One advantage of the access interlocks is that there is no need to
run power wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped
key rotary switch on a control panel and the key is then handcarried to the gate by the operator.
The Single-key Access Lock (SAL) and Single-key Chain Lock (SCL)
are designed to be used to access hazardous areas where partial
body exposure is required. If two keys are needed for partial body
access, select the Dual-key Access Lock (DAL) or Dual-key Chain
Lock (DCL) with both keys trapped.
Misalignment Tolerance
±10 mm (0.39 in.)
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Material
316L stainless steel
Mounting
SAL and SCL: 2 or 4 x M5 counterbored
from top or 2 or 4 x M5 from underside
with nuts
DAL and DCL: 4 or 6 x M5 counterbored
from top or 4 or 6 x M5 from underside
with nuts
Weight [kg (lbs)]
SAL and SCL: 0.8 (1.8)
DAL and DCL: 1.35 (3)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
When whole body access is needed, the DAL or DCL, with one key
trapped and one key free should be used. The secondary key
serves the function of a personnel key. The DAL and DCL allow the
operator to carry the personnel key into the hazardous area. When
the operator returns from the hazardous area and returns the
personnel key to the DAL or DCL, the locking sequence can be
reversed and the process restarted.
Features
11-Cat. No.
Index
316L stainless steel construction
Direct drive operation
Fitted with tamper resistant screws
Stainless steel dust cap as standard
Replaceable code barrel assembly
Solenoid and electric versions
Multiple key options
Logic
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel
construction.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-128
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-129
Safety Switches
Access/Chain Interlocks
Actuator Type
Trapped Key Condition
Cat. No.
Lever
Key trapped to release lever
440T-MSALE101
Chain
Key trapped to release chain
440T-MSCLE101
Extended Lever
Key trapped to release lever
440T-MSALE201
Lever
Key trapped to release lever
440T-MSALE111
Chain
Key trapped to release chain
440T-MSCLE111
Lever
Primary key trapped, secondary key free to
release lever
440T-MDALE101⊗
Both keys trapped to release lever
440T-MDALE1111
Chain
Primary key trapped, secondary key free to
release chain
440T-MDCLE101⊗
Both keys trapped to release chain
440T-MDCLE1111
Primary key trapped, secondary key free to
release lever
440T-MDALE451⊗
Primary key trapped, secondary spring eject
key
440T-MDCLJ101⊗
Lever
One primary trapped, two secondary keys
free to release lever
440T-MTALE111⊗⊗
Chain
One primary trapped, two secondary keys
free to release chain
440T-MTCLE111⊗⊗
Single key
Single key with padlock hasp
Dual key
Dual key with padlock hasp
Lever
Lever
Dual key with eject key
Chain
Triple key
440T-MDALJ101⊗
Principles
Type
General
Product Selection - Mechanical
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
9-
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Contact Type
Type
Actuator Type
Lever
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
break before make
Dual Key
Chain
Trapped Key Condition
Cat. No.
Both keys trapped to release
lever
440T-MDASE2111
Primary key trapped, secondary
key free to release lever
440T-MDASE201⊗
Both keys trapped to release
chain
440T-MDCSE2111
Primary key trapped, secondary
key free to release chain
440T-MDCSE201⊗
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Product Selection - Electrical
Accessories
Additional Information
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
3-140
440T-ASCBE141
440T-ASFC101
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
Replacement actuator type lever
⎯
440T-ACAD10
Replacement actuator type chain
⎯
440T-ACHA10
Stainless steel ejector key
⎯
440T-AKEYE131
11-Cat. No.
Index
Description
Stainless steel key
Power
Logic
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-129
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-130
Safety Switches
Access/Chain Interlocks
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
MSALE10
MSALE11
24.4
(0.96)
25.4 (1)
12.7 (0.5)
12.7 (0.5)
3.5 (0.14) CRS
28.5 (1.12)
PITCH
MIN.
28.5 (1.12)
PITCH
MIN.
28.5 (1.12) 44.5
& 30 (1.18) (1.75)
CRS
Principles
35.3 (1.39)
10
PITCH M5 C'BORED (0.39)
MAX.
FIXINGS
HASP EXTENDED
CATCH FREE
3.5 (0.14) CRS
48.5
(1.91)
28.5 (1.12)
& 30 (1.18)
CRS
10 (0.39)
35.3 (1.39)
PITCH
MAX.
CATCH ASSY FOR 440T-MSCLE11
CHAIN ASSEMBLY FOR SCLE10
92.4
(3.64)
92.4
(3.64)
28
25.4 (1) (1.1)
12 (0.47)
9-
CATCH ASSEMBLY FOR SALE10
25.4 27.4
(1) (1.08)
12 (0.47)
CATCH ASSY
FOR 440T-MSALE11
59.7 (2.35)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
MDALE10 and MDCLE10
60 (2.36)
MDALE11
25.4 (1)
25.4 (1)
M5 C'BORED FIXINGS
12.7 (0.5)
3.5 (0.14)
28.5 (1.12)
PITCH
MIN.
3.5 (0.14)
M5 C'BORED FIXINGS
12.7 (0.5)
28.5 (1.12) &
30 (1.18) CRS
28.5 (1.12) &
30 (1.18) CRS
28.5 (1.12)
MIN. CRS
44.3 48.5
(1.74) (1.91)
SECONDARY
10 (0.39)
11-Cat. No.
Index
35.3 (1.39)
PITCH
MAX.
44.5 48.5
(1.75) (1.91)
57.7 (2.27)
CRS
DCLE10 CATCH ASSY.
44.3 48.5
(1.74) (1.91)
PRIMARY
35.3 (1.39)
MAX. CRS
57.7 (2.27)
10 (0.39)
DCLE CATCH ASSY.
57.7 (2.27)
30.5 (1.2) 57.7 (2.27)
30.5 (1.2)
92.4
(3.64)
25.4 30
(1) (1.18)
12 (0.47)
25.4 30
(1) (1.18)
12 (0.47)
Logic
DALE10 CATCH ASSY.
118 (4.65)
DALE CATCH ASSY.
118 (4.65)
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-130
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-131
Safety Switches
Access/Chain Interlocks
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
MDALE45
MTALE11
HASP
5.4
(0.21)
Ø8 (0.31)
HOLE
10
(0.39)
3.4
(0.13)
57.7 (2.27)
3.5
(0.14) M5 CLEARANCE
175 (6.89)
57.7 (2.27)
48.5
(1.91)
28.5
(1.12)
30 (1.18)
CRS
35.3
(1.39)
VIEW WITH CATCH TRAPPED
3 (0.12)
30.5 (1.2)
PRIMARY
Principles
12.7
(0.5)
PRIMARY
SECONDARY KEYS
SUPPLIED FITTED
SECONDARY
General
Dimensions not intended to be used for installation purposes.
SECONDARY #2
SECONDARY #1
30
(1.18)
VIEW WITH CATCH FREE
9-
12
(0.47)
MTCLE11
175 (6.89)
57.7 (2.27)
3.5 (0.14)
M5 CLEARANCE
57.7 (2.27)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
10
(0.39)
48.5
(1.91)
28.5 (1.12) &
30 (1.18) CRS
VIEW WITH CATCH TRAPPED
SECONDARY KEYS
SUPPLIED FITTED
SECONDARY #2
SECONDARY #1
11-Cat. No.
Index
PRIMARY
30
(1.18)
12
(0.47)
Power
Logic
VIEW WITH CATCH FREE
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-131
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-132
Safety Switches
Slamlock Mechanical
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, GS-ET-19,
ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119, AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives
and BG; C-Tick not required
Operating Characteristics
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-40…+200 ° (-40…+392 °)
Mechanical Life
In excess of 100,000 operations under
normal working conditions
Description
Code Barrel Life
Tested to 100,000 operations
The Prosafe Slamlock combines the features of trapped keys with
tongue actuated interlocks. When the actuator is inserted into the
interlock (guard closed), the trapped key can be rotated and
removed. With the key free, the actuator can not be removed thus
locking closed the guard door. The trapped key must be re-inserted
and rotated 90° to unlock the guard.
Environmental & Physical Characteristics
Single
Dual
Principles
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Relative Humidity
95%
Weight [kg (lbs)]
Single Key: 0.76 (1.68)
Dual Key: 1.33 (2.93)
9-
Slamlocks are manufactured in 316L stainless steel to provide a
rugged, industrial grade method of interlocking guard doors.
Ambient Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+50 ° (14…122 °)
Material
316L stainless steel
One advantage of the slamlock is that there is no need to run power
wires to the gate. Power is disconnected by a trapped key on a
control panel or by a Prosafe RKS type unit and the key is then
hand-carried to the gate by the operator.
Mounting
SSL: 2 x M5 counterbored from top or 2 x
M5 from underside with nuts
DSS: 4 x M5 counterbored from top or 4 x
M5 from underside with nuts
Holding Force, Max.
2000 N (450 lbs)
The Single-key Slamlock (SSL) is used to interlock hatches, guards
and doors where full body access is not required.
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Dual-key Slamlock (DSL) is similar to the single key version but has
a secondary key to allow "two key in" or "key exchange" conditions.
The key exchange version may be used where whole body access
is required, as the secondary key can be used as a personnel key.
Features
11-Cat. No.
Index
316L stainless steel construction
Selection of actuator types available
Direct drive operation
Replaceable code barrel assembly
Fitted with tamper resistant screws
Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
Multiple key options
Logic
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel
construction.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-132
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-133
Safety Switches
Slamlock Mechanical
Product Selection
Trapped Key Condition
Cat. No.
440T-MSSLE101
Standard
Flexible
Single key
440T-MSSLE111
Key trapped to release actuator
Flat
440T-MSSLE121
Standard
440T-MDSLE101⊗
Primary key trapped, secondary key free to
release actuator
Flexible
440T-MDSLE111⊗
440T-MDSLE121⊗
Flat
Dual key
440T-MDSLE2011
Standard
Flexible
440T-MDSLE2211
Both keys trapped to release actuator
Flat
440T-MDSLE2311
Standard
440T-MDSLJ101⊗
Primary key trapped, secondary key free to
release actuator
Flexible
Dual with secondary ejector key
General
Actuator Type
440T-MDSLJ111⊗
440T-MDSLJ121⊗
Flat
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Principles
Type
Accessories
Description
Additional Information
Cat. No.
Stainless steel key
440T-AKEYE10⊗
440T-AKEYE13⊗
3-140
440T-ASCBE141
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
440T-ASFC10⊗
GD2 standard actuator
⎯
GD2 flat actuator
⎯
440K-A11112
Fully flex actuator
⎯
440G-A27143
9-
Stainless steel ejector key
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
440G-A27011
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Dual Key Slamlock
3.5 (0.14)
20.8
(0.82)
28.5 30
(1.12) (1.18)
M5 C'BORES ON TOP
AND BOTTOM FACES
64.1 (2.52)
TOP ENTRY
57 (2.24)
31.6
(1.24)
43.6 (1.72)
57.7 (2.27)
3.5 (0.13)
3.5 (0.13)
38.3
(1.5)
43.6 (1.71)
Top Entry
57.7
(2.27)
64.1 (2.52)
10
(0.39)
13 (0.51)
19 (0.75)
WITH 440T-MSSLE10
WITH 440T-MSSLE11
25.4
(1.0)
5.5 (0.22)
151 (5.94)
Bottom Entry
20
(0.79)
40
(1.57)
18
(0.71)
4
(0.16)
20.2
(0.8)
36
25
(1.42) (0.98)
3.5
(0.14)
57 (2.24)
WITH 440T-MSSLE12
Flat Actuator
17.5
(0.69)
Flexible/Adjustable Actuator
3.5
(0.14)
18
(0.71)
6.8 (0.27)
57 (2.24)
Adjusting
screws
2 x M3
Standard Actuator
18
(0.71)
4 (0.16)
14.5
(0.57)
40
(1.57)
20.8 (0.81)
8
(0.31)
40 (1.57)
52 (2.05)
8 (0.31)
36 (1.42)
20
(0.79)
36 (1.42)
52
(2.05)
40
(1.57)
Ø4.4 17.5
(0.17) (0.69)
Logic
5.8 (0.23)
8
(0.31)
Ø5.5
(2.2)
Primary
4 x Ø5.5
(0.22)
M5 CSK
14.5
(0.57)
18 (0.71)
36
(1.42)
51 (2.01)
Secondary
13 (0.51)
19 (0.75)
51(2.01)
52
(2.05)
5.5 (0.22)
FRONT
6.6 (0.26)
31 (1.22
3.5 (0.14)
92 (3.62)
52 (2.05)
40 (1.57)
4 (0.16)
34.6
(1.36)
25
(0.98)
20.8
(0.82)
37
(1.46)
34 (1.33)
5 (0.2)
Code Barrel
Screws M4 x 8
Torx Head
Front Entry
5 (0.19)
92.4
(3.63)
3.5 (0.14)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-133
Power
4.9
(0.19)
48 (1.88)
ACTUATOR,
SEE BELOW
M5 Counterbored from Top.
M5 Fixing from Underside
Using M5 Nuts in
Recesses
20.8 (0.81)
4 (0.16)
28.5 (1.12) &
30 (1.18)
Pitch Range
Single Key Slamlock
11-Cat. No.
Index
3-Trapped Key
Switches
⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See 3-107 for code selection.
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-134
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN1088, IEC/EN60947-5-1, GS-ET19, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119,
AS4024.1
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1)
Suitable for Cat. 2, 3, or 4 systems
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable
directives and BG; C-Tick not
required
Outputs
Principles
Safety Contacts
2 N.C. positive break
Switching Current @ Voltage, Max.
500V/500V A
Thermal Current (Ith)
10 A
9-
Current, Min.
5 mA @ 5V DC
Safety Contact Gap
>2 x 2 mm (0.07 in.)
Description
Rated Insulation Voltage
(Ui) 500V
The Prosafe Slamlock with electrical isolation combines the features
of trapped key tongue actuated interlocks while also providing sets
of electrical safety and auxiliary contacts. When the actuator is
inserted into the lock and the key is removed the actuator is trapped
in the unit thus locking closed the guard door. In this state the
safety contacts are closed and the auxiliary contacts are open. To
open the guard door the key must be inserted and rotated 90°,
opening the safety contacts, closing the auxiliary contacts and
enabling the actuator to be released thus unlocking the guard door.
While the guard door is open the key is trapped in the unit.
Rated Impulse withstand Voltage
(Uimp) 2500V
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Single
Dual
3-Trapped Key
Switches
Slamlocks with electrical isolation offer the features of electrical
safety interlock switches with the benefits of a trapped key/enforced
sequence systems. They allow a combination of both approaches
for safeguarding machinery and processes to be used.
The Single-key Slamlock (SSS) is used to interlock hatches, guards
and doors where full body access is not required. The single key
locks the actuator and operates the switch in the same action.
Dual-key Slamlock (DSS) is similar to the single key version but has
a secondary key to allow "two key in" or "key exchange" conditions.
The key exchange version may be used where whole body access
is required, as the secondary key can be used as a personnel key.
Features
11-Cat. No.
Index
Electrical safety contacts combined with trapped key/enforced
sequence feature
Most of unit constructed from 316L stainless steel
Selection of actuator types available
Single or dual key versions available
Direct drive operation
Replaceable code barrel assembly
Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
Solenoid versions
Logic
The Prosafe Advantage
Operating Characteristics
Break Contact Force, Min.
12 N (2.7 lbs)
Actuation Speed, Max.
1 ms
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycle/s
Utilization Category
(Ue) 500V
AC 15
(le) 1 A
DC
250V
250V
100V
2A
5A
0.5 A, 24V
2A
Environmental Characteristics
Enclosure Type Rating
IP67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
Electrical: -20…+80 ° (-4…+176°)
Solenoid: -20…+60 ° (-4…+140 °)
Relative Humidity
95%
Physical Characteristics
Actuator Travel for Positive Opening
5 mm (0.19 in.)
Operating Radius, Min.
175 mm (6.88 in.) [60 mm (2.36 in.)
with flexible actuator]
Actuator Holding Force, Max.
2000 N (450 lbs)
Releasable Load, Max.
100 N (22.5 lbs)
Case Material
UL Approved glass-filled polyester &
316L stainless steel
Actuator Material
Stainless steel
Conduit Entry
3 x M20
Mounting
SSS: 4 x M5 counterbored from top
or 4 x M5 from underside with nuts
DSS: 6 x M5 counterbored from top
or 6 x M5 from underside with nuts
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Weight [g (lbs)]
SSE: 1160 (2.6)
DSSE: 1700 (3.7)
Color
Red/Stainless
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Pollution Degree
3
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Note: The safety contacts of the Guardmaster switches are described as
normally closed (N.C.), i.e. with the guard closed, actuator in place
(where relevant) and the machine able to be started.
Power
Stainless steel
construction.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-134
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-135
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Trapped Key Condition
Key trapped to release actuator
Single key
Key free to release actuator
Primary key trapped, secondary
key free to release actuator
440T-MSSSE101
Flexible
440T-MSSSE111
Flat
440T-MSSSE121
Standard
440T-MSSSE201
Flexible
440T-MSSSE221
Flat
440T-MSSSE231
440T-MDSSE101⊗
440T-MDSSJ101⊗
Primary key trapped, secondary
key free to release actuator
440T-MDSSE111⊗
Flexible
Primary key trapped, secondary
key eject to release actuator
Dual key
Cat. No.
Standard
Standard
Primary key trapped, secondary
key eject to release actuator
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Break before make
Actuator Type
440T-MDSSJ111⊗
Primary key trapped, secondary
key free to release actuator
440T-MDSSE121⊗
Flat
Primary key trapped, secondary
key eject to release actuator
440T-MDSSJ121⊗
Both keys free to release actuator
2 N.C. + 2 N.O.
Break before make
Single key
Principles
Type
Key free to release actuator
Standard
440T-MDSSE2011
Flexible
440T-MDSSE2211
Flat
440T-MDSSE2311
Standard
440T-MSSSE261
Flexible
440T-MSSSE271
Flat
440T-MSSSE251
9-
Contact Type
General
Product Selection - Electrical
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Contact Type
Type
Trapped Key Condition
Key free to release
actuator
Single key
2 N.C. & 1 N.O.
Break before make
Solenoid Voltage
Dual key
Single key
Actuator Type
Cat. No.
Standard
440T-MSSUE201
Flexible
440T-MSSUE221
24V DC
Primary key trapped,
secondary key free to
release actuator
24V DC
Key free to release
actuator
110V AC
Flat
440T-MSSUE231
Standard
440T-MDSUE101
Flexible
440T-MDSUE111
Flat
440T-MSSUE121
Standard
440T-MSSUE501
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Single Key Slamlock
3.5 (0.13)
Safety Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts
38.3 (1.5)
11-Cat. No.
Index
Product Selection - Solenoid
3-Trapped Key
Switches
⊗ Substitute the desired secondary code for this symbol (key included). See 3-107 for code selection.
11 21 33
48
(1.88)
20.8
(0.81)
40
(1.57)
Logic
12 22 34
43.6 (1.71)
64.1 (2.52)
4 x M5
Top Entry
Front Entry
5
(0.19)
20.8
(0.81)
93 (3.66)
4
(0.15)
Power
5.5
(0.21)
34
(1.33)
M20
Bottom Entry
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-135
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-136
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
Dual Key Slamlock
4 (0.16)
20.8 (0.82)
TOP ENTRY
5.5 (0.22) SLOTS AND HOLE
3.5
(0.14)
28.5 (1.12) &
30 (1.18) CRS
40 (1.57) 58 (2.28)
20.5
(0.81)
20.5
(0.81)
7 (0.28)
ACTUATOR
(SEE BELOW)
4.9 (0.19)
Principles
43.6
(1.72)
57.7
(2.27)
8
(0.31)
15 (0.59)
73.6 (2.9)
SECONDARY
PRIMARY
92.4
(3.64)
5 (0.2)
32.5
(1.28)
37 (1.46)
20.8 (0.82)
FRONT
ENTRY
5.5
(0.22)
236 (9.29)
9440G-A27011
STANDARD
4
(0.16)
440G-A27143
FLEXIBLE
6.6 (0.26)
52
40
(2.05) (1.6)
10
(0.39)
40
(1.6)
18
(0.71)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
13
(0.51)
14.5 (0.57) 19
(0.75)
36
(1.42)
4
(0.16)
20.2
(0.8)
25 (0.98)
51 (2.01)
30 (1.18)
28.5 (1.12)
PITCHES
3.5
(0.14)
SLOTS FOR M5 SCREWS
8
(0.31)
Ø4.4
(0.17)
36
20
(1.42) (0.79)
40 (1.6)
18 (0.71)
440K-A11112
FLAT
5.8 (0.23)
Ø5.5
(0.22)
3.5 (0.14)
52
(2.05)
8
(0.31)
17.5 (0.69)
3.5
(0.14)
57 (2.24)
5.5 (0.22) SLOTS & HOLE
3.5 (0.14)
40.2 59
(1.58) (2.32)
11-Cat. No.
Index
20.8 (0.82)
TOP ENTRY
7
(0.28)
ACTUATOR
(SEE BELOW)
57.7 (2.27)
4.9
(0.19)
131.3 (5.17)
43.6 (1.72)
8 (0.31)
15
(0.59)
KEY#2
KEY#1
5 (0.2)
Logic
5.5
(0.22)
37
35
(1.38)
14 (0.55)
FRONT ENTRY
20.8
(0.82)
440G-A27011
STANDARD
440G-A27143
FLEXIBLE
6.6 (0.26)
3.5 (0.14)
4 (0.16)
Power
52
(2.05)
18 (0.71)
36
(1.42)
8
(0.31)
5.8 (0.23)
10
(0.39)
Ø5.5
(0.22)
40
(1.57)
52 40
(2.05) (1.57)
14.5 (0.57)
13
(0.51)
40
(1.57)
18
(0.71)
19
(0.75)
440K-A11112
FLAT
17.5
(0.69)
36 20
(1.42) (0.79)
20.2
(0.8)
25
(0.98)
8
(0.31)
Ø4.4
(0.17)
57 (2.24)
3.5
(0.14)
51 (2.01)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-136
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-137
Safety Switches
Slamlock Electrical
Accessories
Description
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
General
36 (1.42)
4 (0.16)
18
(0.71)
GD2 standard actuator
440G-A27011
40 (1.57)
M5 CSK
Principles
14.5
(0.57)
52 (2.05)
3.5 (0.14)
3.5
(0.14)
440K-A11112
9-
36 (1.42)
18
(0.71)
13 (0.51)
19 (0.75)
51(2.01)
31 (1.22
Fully flex actuator
52 (2.05)
40 (1.57)
Adjusting
screws
2 x M3
8 (0.31)
20
(0.79)
440G-A27143
4 x Ø5.5
(0.22)
Stainless steel key
440T-AKEYE10⊗
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust
cap
page 3-140
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
3-Trapped Key
Switches
6.8 (0.27)
440T-ASCBE141
440T-ASFC10⊗
11-Cat. No.
Index
GD2 flat actuator
25
(0.98)
57 (2.24)
17.5
(0.69)
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
⊗ Substitute the desired code for this symbol. See 3-107 for code selection.
Typical Applications
Logic
Actuator out, key trapped, safety
contacts open, auxiliary contact closed.
Key
Contacts Housing
Power
Actuator
Locking force = 2000 N (450 lb)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-137
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-138
Safety Switches
Miniature Valve Interlocks
Specifications
General
Standards
EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119,
AS4024.1
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable
directives and BG
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+40 ° (14…104 °)
Mechanical Life
100,000 operations
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs)
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in)
Relative Humidity
25…95%
Material
316L stainless steel
Principles
Product Selection
Features
Valve Size
9-
Direct drive operation
Supplied with valves 0.25…1 in.
Direct body mounting with security screws
Locked open or locked closed options
Virtually maintenance free
Weatherproof stainless steel dust cap as standard
Replaceable code barrel assembly
Valve is chrome-plated brass
Valve Status
0.375 in. BSP
Key Free/Valve Locked
Closed
440T-VMVLE131
0.25 in. BSP
Key Free/Valve Locked
Open
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
2.0 in. BSP
LOCKING
DISC
440T-VMVLE141
440T-VMVLE151
0.5 in. BSP
1.0 in. BSP
440T-VMVLE111
440T-VMVLE121
0.5 in. BSP
0.375 in. BSP
Cat. No.
440T-VMVLE101
0.25 in. BSP
Key Free/Valve Locked
Closed
440T-VMVLE181
Key Free/Valve Locked
Open
440T-VMVLE191
Key Free/Valve Locked
Closed
440T-VMVLE201
Key Free/Valve Locked
Open
440T-VMVLE211
3-Trapped Key
Switches
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See
3-107 for code selection.
BSP = British standard pipe threads.
Accessories
70
(2.76)
Description
CODE BARREL
ASSEMBLY
Additional Information
Stainless steel replacement
code barrel with dust cap
11-Cat. No.
Index
Stainless steel weatherproof
replacement dust cap
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
3-140
440T-ASCBE141
440T-ASFC101
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See
3-107 for code selection.
6
(2.44)
Logic
6.35 mm (0.25 in.)
BSSP ENTRIES
BRASS BODY
10 mm (0.39 in.) BORE
50 BAR
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Power
Model
A
B
C
440T-VMVLE10
104 (4.1)
68 (2.7)
38 (1.5)
440T-VMVLE11
104 (4.1)
68 (2.7)
38 (1.5)
440T-VMVLE12
112 (4.4)
80 (3.2)
48 (1.9)
440T-VMVLE13
104 (4.1)
68 (2.7)
38 (1.5)
440T-VMVLE14
104 (4.1)
68 (2.7)
38 (1.5)
440T-VMVLE15
112 (4.4)
80 (3.2)
48 (1.9)
440T-VMVLE16
108 (4.3)
110 (4.3)
53 (2.1)
440T-VMVLE17
108 (4.3)
110 (4.3)
53 (2.1)
440T-VMVLE18
115 (4.5)
110 (4.3)
61 (2.4)
440T-VMVLE19
115 (4.5)
110 (4.3)
61 (2.4)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-138
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-139
Safety Switches
Switchgear Adaptors
Mounting
2 x M4
Trap Direction
Cat. No.
65° CW to trap
440T-MSGAU101
65° CCW to trap
440T-MSGAU111
90° CW to trap
440T-MSGAU121
90° CCW to trap
440T-MSGAU131
±90° to trap
440T-MSGAU141
45° CW to trap
440T-MSGAU171
45° CCW to trap
440T-MSGAU181
General
Product Selection (3/8 square shaft)
Description
3-107 for code selection.
The switch gear adaptor is used to interlock preparatory switch gear
applications or other host equipment such as spool valves. Power is
isolated and locked off when the key is rotated and removed. The
key can then be used in the next sequence of operation.
Accessories
Description
Additional Information
Stainless steel ejector key
Features
Cat. No.
440T-AKEYE101
Stainless steel key
440T-AKEYE131
3-140
Stainless steel weatherproof
replacement dust cap
Virtually maintenance free
Principles
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See
440T-ASFC101
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See
Specifications
3-107 for code selection.
Category
Cat. 1 per EN 954-1
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable
directives and BG
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
45° Mounting Type
Panel Drilling Detail
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-10…+50 ° (14…122 °)
Mechanical Life
>100,000 operations
Shear Force to Key
15.1 k•N (3398 lbs), max.
Torque to Key
14 N•m (124 lb•in), max.
Relative Humidity
95%
Weight [kg (lbs)]
0.30 (0.66)
Material
316L stainless steel
Mounting
2 x M4
50.8 (2)
45°
45°
Ø25 (0.98)
3/8 in2 x 7/8 in long (standard)
9/16 in dia. x 7/8 in long (optional:
contact factory)
Shaft Dimensions
R8
(0.31)
R8 (0.31)
50.8 (2)
CRS
Ø8 (0.31)
R20.5
(0.81)
R20.5 (0.81)
Ø8 (0.31)
31.3
(1.23)
3-Trapped Key
Switches
9-
EN1088, ISO12100-1&2, ISO14119,
AS4024.1
Standards
45°
5
(0.2)
45°
Ø16 (0.63)
HOLE
Ø16 (0.63)
HOLE
PANEL DRILLING
Ø8 (0.31)
HOLES
COUNTER CLOCKWISE
TO TRAP KEY
Logic
Ø8 (0.31)
HOLES
CLOCKWISE
TO TRAP KEY
11-Cat. No.
Index
10 (0.39)
Power
The Prosafe Advantage
Stainless steel
construction.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-139
03-SafetySw_5_TrapKey
5/6/2010
10:49 AM
Page 3-140
Safety Switches
Accessories
Accessories
Description
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
HANDLE
General
50 (1.97)
16 (0.63)
A
Stainless steel key
SPECIAL TAGGING
AS REQUESTED
BY CUSTOMER
63
(2.48)
440T-AKEYE101
SEAL
STANDARD LABELING
WHITE CHARACTERS
ON RED BACKGROUND
ON BOTH SIDES
SPECIAL LABELING
STUB
Principles
KEY WHEN FREE
50 (1.97)
440T-AKEYE131
33.5 (1.32)
Stainless steel ejector key
74.5 (2.93)
90.5 (3.56)
40 (1.57)
KEY IN CODE BARREL
Ø17.2
(0.68)
SPRING HOUSING
9-
Ø20 (0.79)
39 (1.54)
440T-ASFC101
Stainless steel weatherproof replacement dust cap
3-Trapped Key
Switches
16
(0.63)
23 (0.91)
42 (1.65)
Stainless steel replacement code barrel for 100 A unit
rotary switch
10 (0.39)
440T-ASCBE111
32 (1.26)
2 Fixing Holes
4.5 (0.18) Dia
23 (0.91)
11-Cat. No.
Index
42 (1.65)
Stainless steel replacement code barrel with dust cap
2 Fixing Holes
4.5 (0.18) Dia
Description
Emergency break glass key box
440T-ASCBE141
32 (1.26)
Material
Cat. No.
Plastic case
440T-AIPB11
Metal case with hammer
440T-AIPB12
Description
Logic
Emergency repair kit for code barrels
2 offset pin code barrels with key
Code
Cat. No.
ER1
440T-AKITE45ER1
ER2
440T-AKITE45ER2
ER3
440T-AKITE45ER3
ER4
440T-AKITE45ER4
ER5
440T-AKITE45ER5
ER6
440T-AKITE45ER6
ER7
440T-AKITE45ER7
ER8
440T-AKITE45ER8
ER9
440T-AKITE45ER9
1 Substitute the desired primary code for this symbol (key not included). See 3-107 for code selection.
Power
Not suitable for 440T-MRKSE14/440T-MRPSE14 OR 440T-MSGAU units.
WARNING: The presence of spare keys, override keys, or spare actuators can compromise the integrity of safety interlocking systems.
Personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss can result from the introduction of spare keys, override keys or spare actuators
into interlocking systems without appropriate management controls, working procedures and alternative protective measures to control their
use and availability.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-140
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-141
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
General
Overview
30 mm Large Metal
15 mm Plastic
General Description
The 440P limit switch family offers a full range of international-style
solutions for both safety and standard sensing applications.
Available in four different body styles—30 mm metal, 22 mm metal
and plastic, and 15 mm plastic—with a broad selection of operator
types, circuit arrangements and connection options, the 440P is
ideal for a wide variety of applications. These include material
handling, packaging, elevators, escalators, scissor lifts, industrial
trucks and tractors, cranes and hoists, overhead door as well as
general safety guarding applications.
The small, plastic-body style isavailable in the following operator
types:
Short lever
Hinge lever
Roller plunger
Dome plunger
Offset hinge lever
The 15 mm plastic switch is available with top push roller and top
push cross roller actuators.
Principles
22 mm Compact Metal
9-
22 mm Small Plastic
Mechanical Enclosure
Contact Arrangements
All 440P international-style limit switches contain positive openingaction contacts, making them ideal for safety-related applications.
The small, plastic models include a choice of snap-acting, slowbreak/make with 2- or 3-contact configurations, while the largemetal switches contain snap-acting, slow-break contacts in 2-, 3-,
or 4-contact configurations. The 15 mm plastic versions are slowbreak, 2-circuit models. The small metal models are all snap-acting,
2-circuit.
Actuator Type
11-Cat. No.
Index
The 440P international-style limit switches are available with a wide
variety of actuators to solve a broad range of applications. All levertype switches include their respective actuator arm. The large,
metal-body style is available in the following operator types:
Metal roller plunger
Metal dome plunger
Metal short lever
3-Limit
Switches
The large metal-body (440P-M) models feature die-cast alloy
construction and conform to EN 50041 (30 x 60 mm), while the
small plastic (440P-C) models are constructed of a glass-filled
polymer and conform to EN 50047 (22 mm). Both body types are
IP66 rated and available with M20 or 1/2 in. NPT conduit opening or
in a micro quick-disconnect version. The 15 mm plastic models
(440P-M18001 and 440P-M18002) are constructed of glass-filled
polyester and are IP30 rated. The 22 mm metal models (440P-A)
have a painted body and are IP66/IP67 rated.
The compact metal body style is available in the following operator
types:
Roller plunger
Dome plunger
Short lever
Cross roller plunger
Power
Logic
All, except the short lever, are available with panel mount threading.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-141
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-142
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
22 mm Compact Metal Position Switches
Specifications
Safety Ratings
General
Standards
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 60204-1, NFPA
79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/EN 60947-5-1,
ANSI B11.19, AS 4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1 Dual channel limit
switch suitable for Cat. 3 or 4 systems when
ganged together
Certifications
UL Recognized, TÜV and CE Marked for all
applicable directives
Outputs
Principles
Description
The 22 mm IEC style metal safety limit switches have been
developed to provide a small metal case with a choice of actuator
heads. All units are supplied with an integral 2 m cable. For safety
applications it is important that upon actuation, the guard or other
moving objects should not pass completely over the switch and
allow the plunger or lever to return to its original position.
Features
9-
Rugged die cast enclosure
Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts (direct
opening action)
Snap-acting contact actuation
Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Pre-wired 2 m cable, bottom or side exit
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. snap acting
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O. snap acting
Thermal Current
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
300V AC
Contact Rating
Maximum AC Contact Rating Per Pole
Amperes
Max.
Voltage Make Break
NEMA
Rating
AC15/B300
120 30
3.0
AC15/B300
240 15
1.5
Continuous
Carrying
Current
(Amp.)
Volt Amperes
5
3600
360
69
69
Make Break
Maximum DC Contact Rating Per Pole
DC13/Q300
240 0.27
0.27
2.5
Operating Characteristics
Actuation Speed, Max.
250 mm/s
Actuation Speed, Min.
100 mm/min
Actuation Frequency, Max. 6000 operations per hr
Mechanical Life
1 x 107
3-Limit
Switches
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
NEMA 1, IP66/67
Operating Temperature
[C (F)]
2…70 ° (35.6…158 °)
Pollution Degree
3
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Die-cast alloy
Actuator Material
Various polymers and metals
11-Cat. No.
Index
Mounting
2 x M14, any position
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6 (10…55 Hz, 0.35 mm amplitude)
Shock
IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis)
Connection Type
2 m (6.5 ft) cable
Color
Red body/black head
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-142
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-143
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
22 mm Compact Metal Position Switches
Operator Type
Roller Plunger
Safety
Auxiliary
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Contact Opening
Characteristics
Typical
Force/Torque
to Operate
Type
Snap Acting
Panel Mount
Bottom Cable
Style
Side Cable Style
No
440P-ARPS11C
440P-ARPS11CS
10 (2.25)
Yes
Dome Plunger
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap Acting
10 (2.25)
Cross Roller
Plunger
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap Acting
10 (2.25)
Snap Acting
0.7 N•m (0.62
lb•in)
0 mm
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
5.2 mm
2 mm
5.5 mm
440P-ARP1S11C 440P-ARP1S11CS
No
440P-ADPS11C
Yes
440P-ADP1S11C 440P-ADP1S11CS
0.6 mm
No
440P-ACRS11C
Yes
440P-ADPS11CS
440P-ACRS11CS
440P-ACR1S11C 440P-ACR1S11CS
85°
Lever
Cat. No.
75° 35° 0° 35° 75° 85°
—
440P-ASLS11C
15°
440P-ASLS11CS
15°
Principles
Contact
General
Product Selection
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
7.2 (0.28)
Dia.
Dome Plunger
43
(1.69)
20
(0.79)
25
(0.98)
37.5
(1.48)
43
(1.69)
16
(0.63)
35
(1.38)
M12 x 1.0
tap
34
(1.34)
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
20
(0.79)
35 (0.98)
30.4 (1.2)
24
(0.94)
Roller Plunger
3.8
(0.15)
40.6
(1.6)
7.2 (0.28)
Dia.
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
20
(0.79)
43
25
(0.98)
(1.69)
20
(0.79)
43
25 (0.98)
(1.69)
37.5
(1.48)
16
(0.63)
35
(1.38)
7.2 (0.28)
Dia.
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
37.5
(1.48)
16
(0.63)
35
(1.38)
30.4 (1.2)
12 (0.47)
Dia.
8 (0.31) Dia.
10.5 (0.41)
Dia.
Side cable style shows strain relief only.
Units include a 2 m integral cable.
Bottom cable style units have same
dimensions as side cable style.
Panel mount clearance hole = 13 mm
(0.51 in.)
Countersink Hole
25 (0.98)
20
(0.79)
3.7
(0.15)
M12 x 1.0
tap
3-Limit
Switches
13 (0.51)
Dia.
10.5
(0.41)
Dia.
30.4 (1.2)
20
(0.79)
Panel Mount
30.4 (1.2)
Two 4.2 (0.165) dia. holes
Countersink: 7.2 (0.28) dia.
Depth: 4.2 (0.165)
7.2 (0.28)
Dia.
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
37.5
(1.48)
16
(0.63)
35
(1.38)
11-Cat. No.
Index
Nonpanel Mount
30.4 (1.2)
30.4 (1.2)
3.8 (0.15)
24
(0.94)
20
(0.79)
25 (0.98)
43
(1.69)
7.2 (0.28)
Dia.
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
37.5
(1.48)
35
(1.38)
7.2 (0.28)
Dia.
Typical Wiring Diagrams
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
37.5
(1.48)
Same Polarity
BLU
BRN
BLK
BLK/WHT
GRN/YEL
Za
35
(1.38)
16
(0.63)
5.2 (0.2)
30.4 (1.2)
35.8
(1.41)
13.5 (0.53)
Dia.
25
(0.98)
Lever Type
39.6
(1.56)
20
(0.79)
43
25
(0.98)
(1.69)
16
(0.63)
10.5
(0.41)
Dia.
M12 x 1.0
tap
7.2 (0.28)
Dia.
18
(0.71)
20
(0.79)
43
25
(0.98)
(1.69)
4.2 (0.17)
Dia.
37.5
(1.48)
Power
Cross Roller
Plunger
12
(0.47)
Dia.
Logic
3.8 (0.15)
9-
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
Bottom Cable Style
35
(1.38)
16
(0.63)
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-143
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-144
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
22 mm Plastic Body
Specifications
Safety Ratings
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/
EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS
4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1 Dual
channel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3
or 4 systems and used with a safety
monitoring device
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load
PFHD: > 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel limit switch may be
suitable for performance levels Ple or
Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006)
and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending on
application characteristics
These switches also feature an optional rotating head that can be
adjusted in 90° increments before installation to allow for ease of
mounting.
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, and TÜV
Allen-Bradley Guardmaster limit switches can be used in guard door
applications as well as on moving machine beds, crane arms, lifts,
elevators, etc.
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C. or 3 N.C.
slow acting
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O. (except 3 N.C. versions)
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
General
Standards
Principles
Description
These 22 mm plastic-body safety limit switches conform to EN
50047 standards and are available with snap-acting or slowbreak/make 2- or 3-contact configurations as well as a variety of
actuator heads.
9-
Operation of these limit switches is achieved by the sliding action of
a guard, or other moving object, deflecting the plunger or lever. For
safety applications, it is important that upon actuation, the guard or
moving object should not pass completely beyond the switch to
allow the plunger or lever to return to its original position—the
plunger or lever must remain engaged by the guard or object.
Outputs
Rated Insulation Voltage
600V AC
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
25 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
N600/DC-13
Features
3-Limit
Switches
Large selection of actuator heads
Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts
Snap-acting, slow make before break or slow break before make
contact blocks
Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. + 1 N.O. 3 N.C.
Conforms to EN 50047, EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292 and
EN 60204-1
Cam Displacement
(A)
30˚
Adjustable Lever Arms
30˚
Logic
60˚
30˚ 30˚
60˚
60˚
30˚
60˚
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3.0 A
6.0 A
(Ue) 600V
(le) 0.4 A
500V
250V
125V
0.55 A
1.1 A
2.2 A
Operating Characteristics
Actuation Speed, Max.
250 mm/s
Actuation Speed, Min.
100 mm/min
Actuation Frequency, Max.
6000 operation per hour
Mechanical Life
1 x 107
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
Operating Examples
(Ue) 600V
IP66
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-25…80° (-18…+176°)
Pollution Degree
3
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled polybutylene
terephthalate
Actuator Material
Various polymers and metals
Mounting
2 x M4, Any position
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6 (10…55 Hz, 0.35 mm
amplitude)
Shock
IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis)
Conduit Entry
M20 or 1/2 inch NPT
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
The actuating cam should be profiled at 30° for optimum operation.
Note: Plunger-type switches operate from a flat profile.
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-144
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-145
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
22 mm Plastic Body
Contact
Description
Safety
1 N.C.
Auxiliary
1 N.O.
Typical
Force/Torque
to Operate
Type
Snap acting
5N
Contact Opening
Characteristics
Cat. No.
1/2 inch NPT
Conduit
2.7
8N
0 mm
11-12
23-24
11-12
23-24
4.0
M20 Conduit
Connector
Style1
6.2
General
Product Selection
440P-CRPS11E 440P-CRPS11B 440P-CRPS11D4
2.4
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
2.1
5N
3.3
6.2
11-12
21-22
33-34
440P-CRPB12E 440P-CRPB12B 440P-CRPB12R6
3.0
0 mm
3 N.C.
—
—
5N
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
6.2
11-12
21-22
31-32
0 mm
Roller Plunger
1.9 3.3
5N
440P-CRPB03E 440P-CRPB03B 440P-CRPB03R6
2.1
5N
3.3
6.2
11-12
21-22
33-34
Principles
0 mm
440P-CRPM12E 440P-CRPM12B 440P-CRPM12R6
1.3
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
5N
2.7
7N
0 mm
11-12
23-24
11-12
23-24
4.0
6.4
440P-CDPS11E 440P-CDPS11B 440P-CDPS11D4
0 mm
0N
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
2.0
5N
3.3
6.4
11-12
21-22
33-34
440P-CDPB12E 440P-CDPB12B 440P-CDPB12R6
9-
2.1
3.0
7N
—
—
5N
0 mm
0N
Dome Plunger
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
2.1 3.3
5N
6.4
440P-CDPB03E 440P-CDPB03B 440P-CDPB03R6
11-12
21-22
31-32
1.9
3.3
6.4
11-12
21-22
33-34
440P-CDPM12E 440P-CDPM12B 440P-CDPM12R6
1.3
5N
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap Acting
5N
0 mm
11-12
23-24
11-12
23-24
3.5
6N
6.5
10.0
440P-CHLS11E 440P-CHLS11B 440P-CHLS11D4
3-Limit
Switches
0mm
0N
3 N.C.
2.6
0 mm
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
3.1
2N
5.3
10.0
11-12
21-22
33-34
440P-CHLB12E 440P-CHLB12B 440P-CHLB12R6
0 mm
3 N.C.
—
—
5N
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
0 mm
Hinge Lever
2.9
2N
5.3
10.0
440P-CHLB03E 440P-CHLB03B 440P-CHLB03R6
11-12
21-22
31-32
3.0
5.3
11-12
21-22
33-34
10.0
440P-CHLM12E 440P-CHLM12B 440P-CHLM12R6
2.5
2N
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector.
889D-F4AC-2
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 6-pin, AC Micro (M12) connector.
889R-F6ECA-2
11-Cat. No.
Index
4.6
Power
Logic
1 D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector and R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) consumer.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-145
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-146
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
22 mm Plastic Body
Product Selection (continued)
General
Contact
Description
Safety
Auxiliary
Typical
Force/Torque
to Operate
Type
Contact Opening
Characteristics
31°
15 cNm
50°
88°
Cat. No.
31°
0° 15 cNm 50°
1/2 inch NPT
Conduit
M20 Conduit
Connector Style1
440P-CSLS11E
440P-CSLS11B
440P-CSLS11D4
440P-CSLB12E
440P-CSLB12B
440P-CSLB12R6
440P-CSLB03E
440P-CSLB03B
440P-CSLB03R6
88°
11-12
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
0.15 N•m
23-24
11-12
23-24
16°
88°
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
0.14 N•m
16°
27°
27°
47°
47° 10 cNm 0°
10 cNm
88°
11-12
21-22
33-34
37°
Principles
88°
3 N.C.
—
—
0.14 N•m
47 °
37°
27° 0° 27°
47°
10 cNm 10 cNm
88°
11-12
21-22
31-32
26°
47°
88°
Short Lever
Plastic Roller
0°
47°
26°
88°
11-12
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
0.14 N•m
440P-CSLM12E 440P-CSLM12B 440P-CSLM12R6
21-22
33-34
17°
10 cNm
88°
17°
10 cNm
31°
15 cNm
50°
31°
0° 15 cNm 50°
88°
11-12
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
0.15 N•m
23-24
440P-CMHS11E 440P-CMHS11B 440P-CMHS11D4
11-12
23-24
16°
88°
9-
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
0.14 N•m
16°
27°
27°
47°
47° 10 cNm 0°
10 cNm
88°
11-12
440P-CMHB12E 440P-CMHB12B 440P-CMHB12R6
21-22
33-34
37°
88°
3 N.C.
—
—
0.14 N•m
47 °
37°
27° 0° 27°
47°
10 cNm 10 cNm
88°
440P-CMHB03E 440P-CMHB03B 440P-CMHB03R6
11-12
21-22
31-32
88°
Short Lever
Metal Roller
47°
26°
0°
26°
47°
88°
11-12
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
0.14 N•m
440P-CMHM12E 440P-CMHM12B 440P-CMHM12R6
21-22
33-34
17°
10 cNm
3-Limit
Switches
17°
10 cNm
4.2
5N
0 mm
6.5
9.0
11-12
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Snap acting
5N
440P-COHS11E
23-24
11-12
440P-COHS11B 440P-COHS11D4
23-24
3.0
0 mm
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
6N
3.9
2N
5.3
9.0
11-12
440P-COHB12E 440P-COHB12B 440P-COHB12R6
21-22
33-34
5.6
3.8
2N
0 mm
3 N.C.
—
—
5N
5.3
9.0
440P-COHB03E 440P-COHB03B 440P-COHB03R6
11-12
21-22
31-32
0 mm
4.0
5.3
9.0
11-12
Offset Hinge
2 N.C.
1 N.O.
MBB
6N
440P-COHM12E 440P-COHM12B 440P-COHM12R6
21-22
33-34
3.1
2N
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 4-pin, DC Micro (M12) connector.
889D-F4AC-2
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 6-pin, AC Micro (M12) connector.
889R-F6ACA-2
1 D4 suffix uses a 4-pin DC Micro (M12) connector and R6 suffix uses a 6-pin AC Micro (dual keyway) consumer.
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-146
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-147
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
22 mm Plastic Body
Typical Wiring Diagrams 1
Two-Circuit Type D4 4-Pin Micro Connector
Same
Polarity
11
12
23
24
Terminal
2
1
3
4
1
11
3
12
2
23
4
24
General
1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Connector Pinout
Contact
N.C.
N.O.
Three-Circuit Type R6 6-Pin Micro Connector
3 N.C.
Connector Pinout
6
32
31
34
33
22
21
22
21
12
11
12
3 N.C.
3
2
11
Terminal
4
1
5
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
1
11
5
12
2
21
6
22
3
33
4
34
2 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Contact
Terminal
N.C.
N.C.
Contact
11
Principles
1 N.O. + 1 N.C.
N.C.
12
21
N.C.
22
31
N.O.
N.C.
32
9-
1 See page 3-145 for positive opening circuits.
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
12
(0.47)
11.5
(0.45)
4.0
(0.15)
17
(0.66)
28
(1.10)
3-Limit
Switches
9.3 (0.36)
Dia.
4.0
(0.15)
90
(3.54)
Max.
79
(3.11)
Max.
20
(0.78)
11-Cat. No.
Index
22
(0.86)
20
(0.78)
22
(0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Dome Plunger
Power
Logic
Roller Plunger
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-147
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-148
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
22 mm Plastic Body
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)] (continued)
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
5
(0.19)
15 (0.59)
Dia.
41 (1.61)
17.5 (0.68)
Dia.
38
(1.49)
50
(1.96)
4.0
(0.15)
Principles
4.0
(0.15)
100
(3.93)
Max.
112
(4.4)
20
(0.78)
22
(0.86)
20
(0.78)
22
(0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
931 (1.22)
Hinge Lever
31 (1.22)
Short Lever,
Metal and Plastic Roller
12
(0.47)
12 (0.47)
Dia.
3-Limit
Switches
42
(1.65)
4.0
(0.15)
103
(4.05)
17
(0.66)
20
(0.78)
22
(0.86)
31 (1.22)
31 (1.22)
Logic
Offset Hinge
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-148
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-149
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
30 mm Metal Body
Specifications
Allen-Bradley Guardmaster can be used in guard door applications
as well as on moving machine beds, crane arms, lifts, elevators, etc.
Operation of these limit switches is achieved by the sliding action of
a guard, or other moving object, deflecting the plunger or lever. For
safety applications, it is important that upon actuation, the guard or
moving object should not pass completely beyond the switch to
allow the plunger or lever to return to its original position—the
plunger or lever must remain engaged by the guard or object.
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dualchannel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3
or 4 systems and used with a safety
monitoring device
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min. load
PFHD: > 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Dual channel limit switch may be
suitable for performance levels Ple or
Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006)
and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending on
application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus, and TÜV
Outputs
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. snap acting, 2 N.C., 3 N.C. or 4
N.C. slow acting
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O., 2 N.O., or zero
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
600V AC
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
25 mA @ 5V DC
Utilization Category
A600/AC-15
Features
Large selection of actuator heads
Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts
Snap-acting, slow make before break or slow break before make
contact blocks
Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O., 2 N.C. + 2 N.O., 3 N.C. + 1 N.O., or
4 N.C.
Conforms to EN 50041, EN 1088, EN 60947-5-1, EN 292 and
EN 60204-1
Principles
These switches feature a rotating head that can be adjusted in 90°
increments before installation to allow for ease of mounting.
Safety Classification
9-
These 30 mm metal-body safety limit switches conform to
EN 50041 standards and are available in snap acting or slow
break/make with 2-, 3- or 4-contact configurations.
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS
4024.1
N600/DC-13
(Ue) 600V
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3.0 A
6.0 A
(Ue) 600V
(le) 0.4 A
500V
250V
125V
0.55 A
1.1 A
2.2 A
Operating Characteristics
Actuation Speed, Max.
250 mm/s
Actuation Speed, Min.
100 mm/min
Actuation Frequency, Max.
6000 operation per hour
Mechanical Life
1 x 107
3-Limit
Switches
Description
Standards
General
Safety Ratings
Environmental
(A)
30˚
30˚ 30˚
60˚
60˚
60˚
-25…80° (-18…+176°)
Pollution Degree
3
Physical Characteristics
Adjustable Lever Arms
30˚
IP66
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
11-Cat. No.
Index
Enclosure Type Rating
Cam Displacement
30˚
60˚
Housing Material
Die-cast alloy
Actuator Material
Various polymers and metals
Mounting
2 x M5, Any position
Vibration
IEC 68-2-6 (10…55 Hz, 0.35 amplitude)
Shock
IEC 68-2-7 (30 Gn 3 pulses per axis)
Conduit Entry
M20 or 1/2 inch NPT
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
For optimum cam operation, the actuating arm should be adjusted
with a 30° offset profile.
Power
Note: Plunger-type switches operate from a flat profile.
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Logic
Operating Examples
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-149
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-150
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
30 mm Metal Body
Product Selection
General
Contact Opening
Characteristics
Contact
Description
Safety
Auxiliary
Type
Typical Force/Torque
to Operate
1/2 inch NPT
Conduit
2.3
10N
0mm
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Cat. No.
4.5
M20 Conduit
Connector 1
7.5
11-12
Snap
Acting
13 N
440P-MRPS11E 440P-MRPS11B 440P-MRPS11N5
23-24
11-12
23-24
1.3
2.0
10N
0mm
4 N.C.
—
—
11 N
4.0
7.5
11-12
440P-MRPB04E 440P-MRPB04B 440P-MRPB04M9
21-22
31-32
41-42
Principles
1.9
10N
0mm
4.0
7.5
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
11 N
440P-MRPB13E 440P-MRPB13B 440P-MRPB13M9
21-22
31-32
43-44
2.7
2.0
10N
0mm
Metal Roller
Plunger
4.0
7.5
11-12
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
11 N
440P-MRPB22E 440P-MRPB22B 440P-MRPB22M9
21-22
33-34
43-44
2.7
2.7
10N
0mm
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
4.5
7.5
11-12
Snap
Acting
13 N
440P-MDPS11E 440P-MDPS11B 440P-MDPS11N5
23-24
11-12
23-24
1.6
9-
2.3
10N
0mm
4 N.C.
—
—
11 N
4.0
7.5
11-12
440P-MDPB04E 440P-MDPB04B 440P-MDPB04M9
21-22
31-32
41-42
2.3
10N
0mm
4.0
7.5
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
11 N
440P-MDPB13E 440P-MDPB13B 440P-MDPB13M9
21-22
31-32
43-44
3.0
2.3
10N
0mm
3-Limit
Switches
Metal Dome
Plunger
4.0
7.5
11-12
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
11 N
440P-MDPB22E 440P-MDPB22B 440P-MDPB22M9
21-22
33-34
43-44
3.0
83°
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
54°
35°
35 cNm
35°
0° 35cNm
54°
83°
11 -1 2
Snap
Acting
0.34 N•m
440P-MSLS11E 440P-MSLS11B 440P-MSLS11N5
23 -2 4
11 -1 2
23 -2 4
15°
83°
4 N.C.
—
—
0.20 N•m
44 °
15°
23° 0° 23°
35cNm
10cNm
44°
83°
11-12
440P-MSLB04E 440P-MSLB04B 440P-MSLB04M9
21-22
31-32
41-42
11-Cat. No.
Index
83°
23°
23°
44°
44° 35cN m 0°
35cN m
83 °
11-12
3 N.C.
1 N.O.
BBM
0.34 N•m
440P-MSLB13E 440P-MSLB13B 440P-MSLB13M9
21-22
31-32
43-44
35°
83°
Metal Short
Lever
35°
23°
23°
44°
44° 35cN m 0°
35cN m
83 °
11-12
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
0.34 N•m
440P-MSLB22E 440P-MSLB22B 440P-MSLB22M9
21-22
33-34
43-44
26°
26°
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 5-pin mini connector.
889N-F5AE-6F
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 12-pin 9-wire.
889M-FX9AE-2
Logic
1 N5 = 5-pin mini connector.
M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-150
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-151
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
30 mm Metal Body
Safety
Contacts
Description
Auxiliary
Contacts
1 N.C.
1 N.O.
Contact Opening
Characteristics
Typical
Force/Torque
to Operate
Contact Type
Snap Acting
Cat. No.
1/2 inch NPT
Conduit
83°
11-12
23-24
11-12
23-24
0.34 N•m
Connector 1
M20 Conduit
35°
35°
54° 35cNm 0° 35cNm 54° 83°
440P-MMHS11E 440P-MMHS11B 440P-MMHS11N5
General
Product Selection (continued)
15° 15°
—
3 N.C.
—
1 N.O.
BBM
0.20 N•m
0.34 N•m
83°
11-12
21-22
31-32
43-44
440P-MMHB04E 440P-MMHB04B 440P-MMHB04M9
20°
20°
44° 35cNm 0°
44° 83°
35cNm
440P-MMHB13E 440P-MMHB13B 440P-MMHB13M9
26°
Metal Short
Lever,
Metal Roller
2 N.C.
2 N.O.
BBM
83°
11-12
21-22
33-34
43-44
0.34 N•m
83°
26°
20°
20°
44° 35cNm 0° 35cNm 44°
83°
440P-MMHB22E 440P-MMHB22B 440P-MMHB22M9
26°
Principles
4 N.C.
21°
21°
44° 35cNm 0° 10cNm 44°
83°
11-12
21-22
31-32
41-42
26°
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 5-pin mini connector.
889N-F5AE-6F
Recommended standard cordset, 2 m, 12-pin 9-wire.
889M-FX9AE-2
1 N5 = 5-pin mini connector.
9-
M9 = 12-pin M23 connector (use 9 wire).
Typical Wiring Diagrams
4 N.C.
1 N.O. 1 N.C.
1 N.O. 3 N.C.
2 N.O. 2 N.C.
31
21
11
11
23
43
31
21
11
43
33
21
11
42
32
22
12
12
24
44
32
22
12
44
34
22
12
3-Limit
Switches
41
Same polarity this side of block
N5 Connector 2 Circuit 5-Pin Mini Connector
1 (N.C.)
23
12
11-Cat. No.
Index
11
24
Auxiliary Circuit (N.O.)
M9 12-Pin M23 Connector
12
1
10
2
7
6
3
11
5
4
1
11
3
12
4
21
6
22
7
31
8
32
9
41
10
42
12
3 N.C. 1 N.O.
Contact
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
Terminal
3 N.C.
Contact
11
N.C.
12
21
N.C.
22
31
N.C.
32
43
N.O.
44
Terminal
11
12
21
22
33
34
43
44
Contact
N.C.
N.C.
N.O.
N.O.
Ground
Power
9
8
Terminal
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
Logic
4 N.C.
Connector Pinout
3-151
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:52 AM
Page 3-152
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
30 mm Metal Body
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
General
17 (0.66)
Dia.
18 (0.70)
Dia.
19
(0.74)
21
(0.82)
34
(1.33)
48
(1.88)
63
(2.48)
105
(4.13)
30
(1.18)
118
(4.64)
30
(1.18)
60
(2.36)
30
(1.18)
64 (2.51)
7 (0.27)
60
(2.36)
60
(2.36)
Principles
40
(1.57)
43
(1.69)
Roller Plunger
33
(1.29)
40
(1.57)
43
(1.69)
33
(1.29)
Dome Plunger
133
(5.23)
40
(1.57)
33
(1.29)
43
(1.69)
Short Lever,
(Metal & Plastic Roller)
9-
3-Limit
Switches
11-Cat. No.
Index
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-152
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-153
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
15 mm Plastic Body
Specifications
Imp 2
Description
The Imp offers safety switch performance of bigger units in the most
compact case available. Designed with two mounting hole options
and a choice of actuator positions, the Imp will fit in most confined
spaces.
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN
60204-1, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO
14119, IEC/ EN 60947-5-1, ANSI
B11.19, AS 4024.1
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN954-1 Dual
channel limit switch suitable for Cat.
3 or 4 systems
B10d: > 2 x 106 operations at min.
load
PFHD: > 3 x10-7
MTTFd: > 385 years
Functional Safety Data 1
Dual channel limit switch may be
Note: For up-to-date information, visit
suitable for performance levels Ple or
http://www.ab.com/Safety/
Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006)
and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending
on application characteristics
Certifications
Principles
Imp 1
Standards
General
Safety Ratings
CE Marked for all applicable
directives and CSA NRTL/C
Outputs
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. positive break
Features
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O.
Positive operation, forced disconnection of contacts
Contacts 1 N.C. + 1 N.O.
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A (Ith)
(Ui) 500V
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
25 mA @ 5V DC
9-
Rated Insulation Voltage
Utilization Category
(le) 1 A
DC
250V
100V
2A
5A
(Ue) 250V
24V
(le) 0.5 A
2A
Actuation Speed, Max.
160 mm (6.29 in.)/s
Actuation Speed, Min.
100 mm (3.93 in.)/min
Actuator Travel, Max.
5 mm (0.20 in.)
Actuation Frequency, Max.
2 cycles/s
Mechanical Life
10,000,000 operations
Electrical Life
1,000,000 operations
Mechanical Life
10,000,000 operations
3-Limit
Switches
Operating Characteristics
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
IP30
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-25…80° (-13…176°)
Pollution Degree
3
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
UL Approved glass-filled PBT
Actuator Material
Stainless steel
Mounting
2 x M4 front or 2 x M3 top
Vibration
10…55 Hz
Shock
11 ms @ 30 g
Conduit Entry
3x break-outs
Color
Red
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
Power
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
11-Cat. No.
Index
(Ue) 500V
Logic
AC-15
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-153
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-154
Safety Switches
IEC Style Switches
15 mm Plastic Body
Product Selection
Contact Action
General
Actuator Type
Contact
Conduit
Top push roller
Top push cross roller
0 mm
Slow break before
make
1 N.C. & 1 N.O.
5
1
Type
Cat. No.
Imp 1 (roller parallel to
440P-M18001
switch front)
3 x breakouts
11/12
23/24
2.5
Imp 2 (roller
perpendicular to
switch front)
440P-M18002
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Principles
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
10.3
(0.41)
Ø11
(0.43)
2.4
(0.09)
2xM3
2xM4
20
(0.79)
5 mm
Roller
Travel
9-
54
(2.13)
4
(0.16)
6 mm square
knockout
(not a conduit opening)
37.7
(1.48)
15
(0.59)
4
(0.16)
3-Limit
Switches
25
(0.98)
15.2
(0.6)
23.3
(0.92)
Wiring Diagrams
11-Cat. No.
Index
11
12
23
24
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-154
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-155
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches
802T Direct Opening Action
Specifications
Direct Opening Action allows the normally closed contacts to open
when the limit switch is actuated. This opening will occur even in
the event of a contact weld condition, up to 10 Newtons.
ATTENTION: To ensure that the normally closed (safety)
contacts open, the limit switch actuator must be
displaced beyond the point of Direct Opening Action (see
specifications).
Safety Classification
Cat. 1 Device per EN 954-1 Dual
channel limit switch suitable for Cat. 3
or 4 systems
Functional Safety Data 1
Note: For up-to-date information,
visit http://www.ab.com/Safety/
B10d = > 2 x 106 operations at min.
load
PFHD = > 3 x10-7
MTTFd = > 385 years
Dual channel limit switch may be
suitable for Performace levels Ple or
Pld (according to ISO 13849-1:2006)
and for use in SIL2 or SIL3 systems
(according to IEC 62061) depending on
application characteristics
Certifications
CE Marked for all applicable directives,
cULus Listed, and TÜV for 2- and 4circuit models
Principles
The 802T Direct Opening Action limit switches have been designed
for use in control reliable applications and safety applications per
ISO 14119. These limit switches utilize the same mounting
dimensions as other NEMA style limit switches. The rugged metal
construction and plug-in body are designed for use in harsh
industrial environments.
EN 954-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 602041, NFPA 79, EN 1088, ISO 14119, IEC/
EN 60947-5-1, ANSI B11.19, AS
4024.1
Outputs
Safety Contacts 1 N.C. snap acting or 2 N.C. snap
acting
Auxiliary Contacts
1 N.O. snap acting or 2 N.O. snap
acting
Thermal CurrentIlth
10 A
Rated Insulation Voltage
300V AC or 600V AC
Switching Current @ Voltage, Min.
—
9-
Description
Standards
General
Safety Ratings
N600/DC-13
500V
240V
120V
(le) 1.2 A
1.4 A
3.0 A
6.0 A
(Ue) 600V
(le) 0.4 A
500V
250V
125V
0.55 A
1.1 A
2.2 A
Operating Characteristics
Actuation Speed, Max.
200 ft/min varies with applied loading
and actuation method1
Actuation Speed, Min.
200 ft/min varies with applied loading
and actuation method1
Typical Applications
Actuation Frequency, Max.
8000 operations per hour
Machine guards
Access gates and doors
Cranes or hoists
Transfer stations
Indexing tables
Robotic cells
Mechanical Life
20 million cycles
Environmental
Enclosure Type Rating
NEMA 4, 6P, 12, 13 and IP65/67
Operating Temperature [C (F)]
-18…+110° (0…+230°)
Pollution Degree
3
Physical Characteristics
Housing Material
Die-cast alloy
Actuator Material
Various metals or plastics
Mounting
2 #10 equal length fasteners
Vibration
Contact fragility (10…2000 Hz @ 0.06
inch peak-to-peak)
Shock
Contact fragility (25 Gn 3 pulses per
axis)
Conduit Entry
1/2 inch NPT or M20
Color
Grey
11-Cat. No.
Index
Direct opening action
Snap acting contacts
Rugged metal construction
Long life and reliability
Plug-in design
NEMA 12, 13, 4, 6P/IP67 sealing
(Ue) 600V
Logic
A600/AC-15
Features
3-Limit
Switches
Utilization Category
based on:
- Usage rate of 1op/10 mins., 24 hrs/day, 360 days/year, representing
51840 operations per year
- Mission time/Proof test interval of 38 years
The safety contacts are described as normally closed (N.C.) i.e., with the
guard closed, actuator in place (where relevant) and the machine able to be
started.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-155
Power
1 Usable for ISO 13849-1:2006 and IEC 62061. Data other than B10d is
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-156
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches
802T Direct Opening Action
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz,
2 Circuits)
General
NEMA
Rating
Designation
A600
AC-15
A
Break
Continuous
Carrying
Current
Make
Break
6.00
10
7200
720
30
3.00
10
7200
720
480
15
1.50
10
7200
720
600
12
1.20
10
7200
720
Max
Voltage
Make
120
60
240
VA
Principles
AC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole, 50 or 60Hz,
4 Circuits)
NEMA
Rating
Designation
A300
A
Max
Voltage
Make
120
60
240
30
Break
Continuous
Carrying
Current
VA
Make
Break
6.00
10
7200
720
3.00
10
7200
720
DC Contact Rating (Maximum per Pole)
A
9-
NEMA Rating
Designation
Q300
Max
Voltage
Make
250
0.27
125
0.55
Break
Continuous
Carrying
Current
VA
Make
Break
0.27
2.5
69
69
0.55
2.5
69
69
DC 13
Low Voltage DC
24V DC @ 1.1 Amps resistive load
3-Limit
Switches
11-Cat. No.
Index
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-156
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-157
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches
802T Direct Opening Action
Range of Operation
Travel to
Operate Contacts
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset
General
Max Travel
Travel to
Reset
Travel to
Operate Contacts
Lever Type
Spring Return
Top Push Roller
Spring Return
Side Push
Vertical Roller
Spring Return
Max Travel
Side Push
Horizontal Roller
Spring Return
Principles
Travel to
Reset Contacts
Product Selection
Number
of
Circuits
Lever
Movement
Typical
Force/Torque
to Operate
Description
Travel to
Operate
Contacts
[mm (in.)]
Travel to
Torque/Force
Operate
to Operate
Direct
Direct
Opening Maximum Travel to Reset
Opening
Action [mm
Travel
Contacts
Action
(in.)]
[mm (in.)]
[mm (in.)]
Cat. No.
2
4
Clockwise
or Counter
Clockwise
2
4
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
9-
Lever Type • Spring Return
1
3
2
4
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
1
3
5
7
2
4
Switch w/o Lever 802T-APD
0.45 N•m
(4.0 lb•in),
max.
13°, max.
28.47 N•m
(6.4 lb•in),
max.
1.17 (0.046),
max.
2
4
6
8
0.90 N•m
(8 lb•in), min.
25°, min.
66.72 N
(15.0 lb), min.
2.29
(0.090),
min.
90°
7°, max.
802T-ATPD
Top Push Roller • Spring Return
4
Operated
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
Complete Switch 802T-DPD
5.99
(0.236)
0.64 (0.025),
max.
802T-DTPD
3-Limit
Switches
Normal
2
Side Push Vertical Roller • Spring Return
4
Operated
1
3
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
Complete Switch 802T-KPD
24.5 N•m
(5.5 lb•in),
max.
2.08 (0.082),
max.
53.4 N
(12.0 lb), min.
4.19
(0.165),
min.
5.74
(0.226)
1.14 (0.045),
max.
802T-KTPD
Side Push Horizontal Roller • Spring Return
4
Operated
2
4
1
3
2
4
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
Complete Switch 802T-K1PD
24.5 N•m
(5.5 lb•in),
max.
2.08 (0.082),
max.
53.4 N
(12.0 lb), min.
4.19
(0.165),
min.
5.74
(0.226)
1.14 (0.045),
max.
802T-K1TPD
Logic
2
Normal
1
3
Power
2
Modifications and Typical Levers⎯page 3-159.
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
11-Cat. No.
Index
Normal
2
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-157
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-158
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches
802T Direct Opening Action
Typical Example of a Dual Channel Safety Application
2-Circuit
4-Circuit
General
Negative Mode
Operation
Positive Mode
Operation
Guard Closed
Guard Closed
Aux 1
Principles
To Safety Related Part of the
Machine Control System
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
Safety
Channel 1
Aux 2
Safety
Channel 2
Approximate Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Dimensions are not intended to be used for installation purposes.
14.7
(0.58)
1.2
(0.05)
20.6
(0.81)
9-
19.1
(0.75)
24
(0.95)
103.4
(4.07)
75.8
(2.98)
70.6
(2.78)
8.7 (0.34)
Dia.
59.5
(2.34)
83.7
(3.3)
3-Limit
Switches
36.5
(1.44)
(2) #10-32
UNF-28
29.4
(1.16)
41.3
(1.63)
42.9
(1.69)
11-Cat. No.
Index
46.8
(1.84)
Plug-In Switch
3.6
(0.14)
43.7
(1.72)
19.6
(0.77)
34.9
(1.38)
51.6
(2.03)
24.4
(0.96)
30.3
(1.19)
12.7
(0.5)
15.2
(0.60)
Logic
Lever Type Head
50.8
(2.0)
3.6
(0.14)
59.6
(2.35)
19.1
(0.75)
23.1
(0.91)
Top Push Roller Head
20.6
(0.81)
12.4
(0.49) Dia.
Side Push Roller Head
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-158
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-159
Safety Switches
NEMA Style Switches
Modifications
Micro-Style Quick-Disconnect
Metric Conduit Entry
Micro quick-disconnects are available with a 5-pin 2-keyway AC or
5-pin single keyway DC. To order a limit switch with a AC micro
quick-disconnect, add the suffix R5 to the cat. no. To order a limit
switch with a DC micro quick-disconnect, add the suffix D5 to the
cat. no. Example: 802TAPDR5 and 802TAPDD5.
Pre-wired Cable
AC Micro QD
To order a factory-installed pre-wired type STOOW-A cable (5conductor), add the suffix Y plus the number of feet required. The
standard cable length is 1.52 m (5 ft). Extended cable lengths are
available in multiples of 1.22 m (4 ft) only.
1
2
2
To order an 802T pre-wired limit switch with a 5-pin (2 circuit) or 9pin (4 circuit) mini connector, add the suffix J1 or J9 depending on
desired wiring (J9 wiring not available for 4-circuit models) to the
cat. no. Example: 802TAPDJ1.
1
5
4
3
5
Mini-Style Quick-Disconnect
1
3
2
1
4
Same
Polarity
4
3
3
4
Levers
"J9" Wiring
4
5
Same
Polarity
Material
Diameter
Width
Cat. No.
Nylon
19.05 (0.75)
7.11 (0.28)
802T-W1
Nylon
19.05 (0.75)
25.4 (1.0)
802T-W1H
Steel
19.05 (0.75)
6.35 (0.25)
802T-W1A
Ball Bearing
19.05 (0.75)
5.84 (0.23)
802T-W1B
1
Same
Polarity
1
2
4
Non-Adj. Cast
Lever
38.1 mm
(1.5 in.)
Radius Roller
on Front
Note: Additional lever options are available in the Limit Switch section of the
Sensors catalog.
3-Limit
Switches
"J1" Wiring
Type
9-
Roller [mm (in.)]
5-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (2 circuit)
5
2
Same
Polarity
Example: To order a limit switch with a factory-installed 1.52 m (5 ft)
cable, the cat. no. would become 802T-APDY5. To order a limit
switch with a factory-installed 2.44 m (8 ft) cable, the cat. no. would
become 802T-APDY8.
2
DC Micro QD
Principles
To order a limit switch with a 20 mm conduit entry, add the suffix S6
to the cat. no. Example: 802T-APDS6.
General
802T Direct Opening Action
11-Cat. No.
Index
9-Pin Mini-Type Receptacle (4 circuit)
"J1" Wiring ("J9" wiring not available for 4 circuit)
4
3
Same
Polarity
1
2
8
6
Logic
Same
Polarity
5
9
1
7
6
8
9
3
4
5
Power
2
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
R
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
3-159
03-SafetySw_6_LimitSw
5/6/2010
10:53 AM
Page 3-160
Safety Switches
Notes
General
Principles
9-
3-Notes
11-Cat. No.
Index
Logic
Power
Visit our website: www.ab.com/catalogs
3-160
Publication S117-CA001A-EN-P
R